SCO 


IRLF 


SB 


fiflM 


ENGIN. 
LIBRARY 


toto  An)  Nocti 

Srfdrs 

REC'B  OCT.2  5192B 


StructuriM  De(rti 
Franeiaco 


Answered  ......  - 

Referred  to—  «•• 
Cony  to  •.•» 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

DEPARTMENT  OF  CIVIL  ENGINEERING 

BERKELEY.  CALIFORNIA 


DRAWING   ROOM 
INSTRUCTIONS 


AMERICAN  BRIDGE  COMPANY 

1916 


At 


. 

Engineering 
Library 


Engineering 
Library 

Copyright  1916  by 
AMERICAN  BRIDGE  COMPANY 


PREFACE 

FT!  HE  purpose  of  this  book  is  to  establish  uniform 
methods  in  the  various  drawing  rooms  of  the 
American  Bridge  Company  and  to  tabulate  for  reference 
information  that  is  constantly  required,  with  the  idea  of 
improving  the  product  and  lowering  its  cost.  The 
instructions  cover  information  that  has  been  issued  from 
time  to  time  and  to  which  has  been  added  such  addi- 
tional information  as  experience  has  shown  desirable. 

It  is  assumed  that  in  the  application  of  these 
instructions  an  interpretation  based  on  experience  and 
common  sense  will  be  used. 


785233 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

(Alphabetical   index   on  page  160.    The  figures  preceding  the 

decimal  points 'indicate  the  page  numbers;  those  which  follow  refer 
to  the  paragraph  numbers  in  the  margin.) 

PREFACE 

CHAPTER  I 

THE  ORDERING  OF   MATERIAL 5.1 

Materials  to  be  Ordered  Promptly 6.6 

Framed  Beams  and  Channels 6.7 

Purlins  and  Crane  Runway  Beams 8.1 

Plate  Girders  and  Chord  Sections 8.4 

Roof  Trusses 9.4 

Pins 9.5 

Shafting 9.6 

Rockers,  Rollers  and  Special  Forgings 10.3 

Milling,  Planing  and  Finishing 10.4 

Bending 11.1 

Sketch  Plates 12.4 

Field  Rivets  and  Bolts 13.4 

Special  Rivets  and  Bolts 14.1 

Fitting-up  Bolts  for  Erection 14.2 

Tie-rods  and  Sag-rods 14.7 

Buckle  Plates 14.8 

Watertight  Work .1  ..&KU-  XI' 15.4 

Rails  and  Splice  Bars 16.1 

Extras  for  Structural  Material 17.1 

Paint ^ 18.1 

Stores— Pencoyd  Plant 18.3 

Elmira  Plant 19.1 

Trenton  Plant 19.2 

Edge  Moor  Plant 19.3 

Ambridge  Plant 20.1 

Canton  Plant 21.1 

Shiffler  Plant ' 21.2 

Toledo  Plant 22.1 

Gary  Plant 22.2 

American  Plant 23.1 

Detroit  Plant 23.2 

St.  Louis  Plant 23.3 

Minneapolis  Plant 24.1 


II  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS— Continued 

CHAPTER   1— Continued 

THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL— Continued 

Maximum  Lengths  of  Shapes  Rolled  by  Carnegie  Mills .  25 
Table  of  Limiting  Sizes  of  Checkered  Plates  Rolled  by 

the  Carnegie  Mills 26. 1 

Maximum  Lengths  of  Shapes  Rolled  by  Pencoyd  Mills  26.2 
Maximum  Lengths  of  Shapes  Rolled  by  Gary  Mills  and 

South  Chicago  Mills 29 

Sizes  and  Lengths  of  Standard  Stock  Carried  by 

American  Bridge  Co.  Plants — Central  Division 30,  31 

Eastern  Division 32,  33 

Western  Division 34,  35 


CHAPTER  II 

PREPARATION  OF  ADVANCE   BILLS 36.1 

When  Advance  Bills  Are  Not  to  be  Written 36.2 

Lengths  on  Advance  Bills 37.1 

A-Stock 37.2 

Eyebars,  Separators  and  Clevises 38.4 

U.  M.  Plates .• 39.1 

Material  Shipped  Direct 39.3 

Material  Specifications 39.4 

Labeling  Material  on  Advance  Bills .39.5 

Miscellaneous  Materials 40.5 

"Ordered"  Column  for  Order  Office •    40.6 

Marking  of  Advance  Bills  Complete 40.7 

Typical  Advance  Bill 41 

Change  Orders. . 42.1 

Typical  Change  Order 42.1 

Manner  of  Writing  Change  Orders 43.1 

Material  Ordered  in  Excess 43.4 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS— Continued  in 

CHAPTER  III 

PREPARATION  OF  MILL  ORDERS  AND  REQUISITIONS  44.1 

Labeling  Mill  Orders 44.4 

Complete 44.5 

Mill  Order  Information  Sheets 45.1 

Plant  Requisitions  and  Reassignment  Requisitions ...  45.3 
Material  Furnished  by  the  Purchasing  and  Contracting 

Departments 46.3 

Change  of  Assignment 46.5 

Finishing  Allowances 47.2 

Multiple  Lengths 48.1 

The  Grouping  of  Lengths 49.3 

Special  Beams 49.5 

Slabs 49.6 

Gas  Pipe 50.2 

Rivet  Rods  and  Tie  Rods 50.3 

Reserving  and  Charging  Stock 50.5 

Compare  Tonnage 50.6 

Material  to  be  Galvanized 50.7 


CHAPTER  IV 

TYPICAL  DRAWINGS 

Purpose  of  Typical  Drawings 51.1 

Limitations  of  Typical  Drawings 51.5 

Omissions  from  Drawings 52.1 

Special  Features  on  Erection  Plans 52.4 

Drafting  Instructions 53.1 

List  of  Typical  Drawings: 

Office  Building  Construction 54 

Mill  Building  Construction 55 

Railway  Pin  Connected  Span 56 

Railway  Riveted  Truss  Span 57 

Railway  Plate  Girder  Spans 57 


IV  TABLE  OF   CONTENTS— Continued 

CHAPTER  V 

THE   PREPARATION   OF   DETAIL   DRAWINGS,   SHOP  AND 
SHIPPING  BILLS 
General  Detailing 

Reference  Lines 58.1 

Field  Connections. 58. 3 

Referring  from  One  Drawing  to  Another 59.1 

Referring  from  One  Member  to  Another  on  Same  Sheet  59.4 

Methods  of  Rivet  Spacing 59.7 

Rights  and  Lefts 61.7 

Angles  Cut  from  Larger  Sizes 62.3 

Cross  Hatching 62.4 

Show  Few  Rivets 62.5 

Holes  in  but  One  View 62.6 

Column  Faces 63.1 

Bracket  Holes  Matching 63.2 

Notes 63.3 

Finishing 64.1 

Pin  Holes - 64.4 

Gas  Pipe  Railing 64.5 

Drawings  and  Bills  for  Duplicate  Members 64.6 

Drawings  and  Bills  for  Different  Classes  of  Material . .  64.7 

Erector's  List  of  Field  Rivets 65.1 

Inter-Shop  Orders '. 65.3 

Titles  for  Drawings 65.4 

Lettering : 65.5 

Detailing  of  Beams 

General 66.1 

Multiple  Beam  Punch 66.3 

Web  and  Flange  Holes 66.7 

Extension  Figures 67.5 

Standard  Connection  Angles 68.5 

Special  Connection  Angles 68.8 

Beveled  Connections 69.1 

Open  Holes  in  Connection  Angles 69.4 

Assembling  Marks 69.7 

Coping 70.1 

Cutting  and  Blocking 70.3 

Variations  in  Length 70.4 

Variations  in  Length  on  Same  Sketch 70.8 

Item  Numbers  on  Sketch  Sheets 71.1 

Beam  Girders 71.2 

Channels 71.4 

Tie-up  of  Main  Connections 71.7 


TABLE   OF  CONTENTS— Continued  V 

CHAPTER  V— Continued 

THE  PREPARATION  OF   DETAIL   DRAWINGS,    SHOP   AND 
SHIPPING  BILLS— Continued 

Shop  Bills 

General '. 72.1 

Forms  to  be  Used 72.2 

Combining  and  Separating  Material 72.6 

Arrangement  of  Material 73.1 

Itemizing 73.3 

Inspection  and  Paint 73.4 

Shipping  Bills 

General 74.1 

Export  Marks 74.7 

Materials  to  be  Listed 74.8 

Materials  Not  Placed  by  Steel  Erectors 75.2 

Inspection 75.3 

Paint 75.4 

Order  Series 76.1 

Subdivisions  of  Orders 

Cost  Subdivision .' 76.2 

Divisions 76.3 

Sections 76.4 

Extras 76.5 

Issuing  of  Prints 77.1 

Revision  of  Drawings 77.2 

Correcting  Errors 78.3 

Description  of  Forms  Used  for  Drawings  and  Bills  and 

System  of  Numbering  Sheets  or  Pages 79 

Numbering  Drawings  and  Bills 80 

Abbreviations ...  81 


CHAPTER  VI 

ASSEMBLING  MARKS 

General. : 83.1 

X  Duplicate  System 83.2 

Ordinary  System 84.3 

Roof  Trusses 85.5 

Trough  Floor 86.1 

Paired  Stiffeners..  86.2 


VI  TABLE  OF   CONTENTS— Continued 

CHAPTER  VII 

ERECTION  AND  SHIPPING  MARKS 

Building  Work 87. 1 

Bridge  Work 91.1 

Special  Work 91.2 

Match  Marking 

Trusses 92. 1 

Tanks 93.4 

Spacing  Rings  for  Draw  Bridges 95.1 


CHAPTER  VIII 

POINTS  TO  BE  OBSERVED  IN  DETAILING 

To  Simplify  Fabrication 

Consult  Plant  Equipment 96.1 

Combining  Templets 96.4 

Multiple  Plate  Punch 97.1 

Riveting 97.4 

Bolting 99.1 

Avoid  Stiffeners 99.6 

Seat  Angles 100.1 

Avoid  Finishing 100.5 

Girder  Depth 100.6 

Symmetry  in  Small  Pieces 100.7 

Avoid  Slight  Variations 100.8 

Three  Web  Chords 100.9 

Use  Few. Sizes .' 101.1 

Connections  to  Variable  Girders 101.2 

Bevel  Bed  Plates 101. a 

Overrun  of  Diaphragms 101.4 

Viaduct  Bents  Alike 101.5 

Variations  in  Length  of  Girders 101.6 

Bending  Long  Pieces 101 .7 

Curved  Plates 102.1 

Curved  Beams 102.2 

Lattice 102. a 

Shearing 102.4 


TABLE  OF   CONTENTS— Continued  VII 

CHAPTER  VIII— Continued 

POINTS  TO  BE  OBSERVED  IN  DETAILING— Continued 

To  Simplify  Erection 103.1 

Pin  Spans 105.1 

Pilot/Nut  Interference. 105.2 

Clearances 105.3 

Packing  of  Eyebars  and  Pin  Plates 105.8 

Clearance  at  Ends  of  Beams  and  Girders 106.1 

Cross  Frame  Clearance 106.3 

Clearance  for  Diagonals 106.5 

Anchor  Bolt  Clearances 106.6 

Movable  Bridge  Clearances 107.4 

Stagger  Turnbuckles 107.6 

Clear  Rivet  Heads. 107.7 

Cut  Flanges  to  Clear '.  !'!.'. 107.8 

Clearance  Above  Rail 108.1 

Clear  Old  Work ./. 108.2 

Entering  Connections 108.3 

Shifting  Members  to  Drive  Rivets 108.4 

Clearance  for  Driving 108.5 

Expansion  Pockets 108.6 

Lateral  Plates  Clear  Ties 108.7 

Slotted  Holes  for  Anchors 109.1 

Length  of  Slots ? ...  ] 109.2 

Erection  Seats 109.3 

Stitch  Loose  Fillers 109.6 

Stitch  Loose  Covers 109.7 

Parts  Reversible .......'.  V ! . . '!'. ! '.' .' . ! '. '. . . . .'.'.. . .- 109.8 

Parts  Not  Reversible £ 109.9 

Marking  Directions 110.1 

Extra  Field  Work 110.2 

Special  Field  Drilling 110.3 

Holes  for  Tap  Bolts . ; ::  v  K 110.4 

Abutting  Deck  Spans 110.5 

Deck  Girders  Erected  by  A.  B.  Co 111.1 

Holes  for  Auxiliary  Work 111.2 

Replacing  Old  Bridges 111.3 

Column  Overrun 111.4 

Anchor  Bolts  in  Advance. .                                                .  111.5 


VHI  TABLE  OF   CONTENTS— Continued 

POINTS  TO  BE  OBSERVED  IN  DETAILING— Continued 
CHAPTER  VIII— Continued 

To  Improve  and  Simplify  the  Design 

Types  of  Details 112.1 

Metal  over  Metal 112.8 

Slabs 113.1 

Deck  Girder  Laterals .^ 113.6 

Lintels .*!" 113.8 

Draw  for  Diagonals 114.1 

Mullions 114.3 

Bases  in  Concrete 114.4 

Upset  Rods 114.5 

Water  Pockets 115.1 

Lateral  Connections • 115.2 

Castings 115.3 

Anchor  Bolt  Types 115.8 

Crane  Rail  Splices 115.9 

Purlin  and  Girt  Spacing 115.10 

Miscellaneous 

Templet  Shop  to  Determine  Lengths 116.1 

Mark  Ends  of  Girders 116.2 

Holes  in  Checkered  Plates 116.3 

Buckle  Plates 116.4 

Name  Plates 116.6 

Galvanized  Structural  Material 

Three  Processes  of  Galvanizing 116.7 

Cleaning 117.1 

Detailing  Material  to  be  Galvanized 117.2 

Bolts 117.7 

Marking  for  Identification 118.1 

Weight  of  Galvanized  Material ' 118.2 

Car  Load  Shipments 118.3 

Watertight  Work 

Riveting ' 119.1 

Punching 120.1 

Edge  Distances 120.2 

Calking 120.3 


TABLE  OF   CONTENTS— Continued  IX 

CHAPTER  IX 

EXPORT  WORK 

General 121.1 

Rail  or  Water  Shipment 122.2 

Extreme  Size  and  Weight  of  Members 122.3 

Detailing .- 122.4 

Title  and  Order  Number 124.6 

Masonry  Plans '124.7 

Anchor  Bolts 124.10 

Drawings  for  Approval 125.1 

Erection  Drawings 125.2 

Erector's  Rivet  and  Bolt  List 125.7 

Corrugated  Steel 125.8 

Marking  and  Numbering 125.9 

Shipping  Bills 126.1 

Shipping  Bill  Prints  for  Export  Company 127.1 

Drawings  for  File  and  Use  in  Erection 127.2 

Duplicate  Tracings  and  Van  Dykes 127.3 

Correspondence 127.4 


CHAPTER  X 

MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS 
Camber 

Railroad  Spans  over  200  feet  and  Highway  Spans  over 

250  feet 128.1 

Railroad  Truss  Spans  up  to  200  feet  and  Highway  Truss 
Spans  up  to  250  feet: 

Railroad ". 129.1 

Highway 129.2 

Curved  Top  Chord  Trusses 129.3 

Diagonals 130.1 

Deck  Bridges . . . . 130.2 

Camber  Diagram 130.3 

Plate  Girder  Spans 130.4 

Roof  Trusses 131.1 

Shop  Rivet  Percentages 

Highway  Bridges 131.4 

Railroad  Bridges 132.1 

Mill  Buildings 132.2 

Office  Buildings 132.3 


X  TABLE  OF   CONTENTS— Continued 

• 

CHAPTER  X— Continued 

MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS— Continued 
Railway  Shipments 

Shipping  Height 132.4 

Shipping  Lengths 133.1 

Shipping  Weights 133.2 

Masonry  Plans,  Masonry  and  Anchor  Bolts 134.1 

Floor  Plans t 135.1 

Grouting  under  Castings 135.6 

Crane  Clearance  Diagram : 135.7 

Small  Cold-Driven  Rivets  .  .  .  136.1 


CHAPTER  XI 

CORRUGATED  AND  FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 

Gauges. ' 137.1 

'     Roofing  and  Siding 137.2 

Birmingham  Wire  Gauge 139.4 

Corrugated  Iron. 139.5 

Copper  Bearing  Sheet  Steel 139.6 

Spacing  of  Supports  for  Different  Gauges 139.7 

Billing  Corrugated  Steel 140.1 

Fastenings  for  Corrugated  Steel .'  140.2 

Straps 140.5 

Clinch  Rivets 141.1 

Clips  and  Bolts 141.5 

Closing  Rivets 142.1 

Nails 142.5 

Stove  Bolts 143.5 

Louvre  Bolts 143.6 

Finish  at  Door  Jambs 143.7 

Fastening  Corrugated  Sheeting  to  Walls 144.1 

Erection  of  Corrugated  Sheeting 144.3 

Painting 145.5 

Corrugated  Steel  Arches 146.1 

Flashing,  Capping,  Cornice,  Ridge  Roll,  Louvres 146.6 

Valley  Gutters 147.7 

Eave  Gutters 148.4 

Conductors .' . .  148.6 

Drawings  and  Bills  for  the  Erector 149.2 

Standard  Sizes 150.1 

Stock  Sizes 150.4 

Extras  for  Sheet  Steel ..  .  151.1 


TABLE   OF    CONTENTS— Continued  XI 

CHAPTER  XII 

• 

LUMBER,  WINDOWS  AND  DOORS 

Lumber 

General * 153.1 

Kinds  and  Sizes  of  Lumber  to  Order  for  Different  Purposes 

Roofing 154.1 

Flooring 154.4 

Highway  Bridge  Floors 155.3 

Railroad  Bridge  Floors 156.1 

Specifications  for  Ordinary  Factory  Windows  and  Doors 

Windows 156.4 

Doors..,  .    158.1 


THE    ORDERING    OF     MATERIAL, 


CHAPTER .J'.'.;./i    '  ;,/*•>-.! J 
THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 

1 .  A  careful  examination  of  the  general  design  should  be 

made  before  any  billing  of  material  is  started,  and 
changes  proposed  wherever  it  is  desirable  to 
eliminate  material  hard  to  obtain  or  details  expen- 
sive to  fabricate.  The  following  changes  are 
suggested : 

2.  Use  solid  webs  instead  of  close  lacing.     Sometimes 

this  will  permit  a  lighter  weight  of  main  angles  by 
counting  the  web  in  section.  The  solid  web  will 
also  permit  easier  painting. 

3.  Use  the  same  section  throughout  for  chords  or  columns 

extending  over  two  panels,  thus  avoiding  shop 
splices. 

4.  Eliminate  stiffeners  on  stringers  by  thickening  the 

webs. 

5.  Avoid  the  use  of  reinforcing  plates  between  angles  of 

chord  sections  by  using  plates  the  full  depth  of  the 
.chord.  If  two  webs  are  used  riveted  together,  see 
page  98.5  for  spacing. 

6.  Change  round  end  girders  to  square  end  girders. 

7.  Use  tie  plates  instead  of  lacing  on  diagonals  in  tension. 

8.  Eliminate  coping  of  I  beams  by  revising  design. 

9.  Study  the  design  of  skew  spans  with  the  object  of 

squaring  the  end  frames,  stringers,  I  beams,  and 
bracing. 

10.  Turn  flanges  of  angles  or  channels  out  for  box-shaped 

sections  to  permit  easier  riveting  of  the  lacing. 

11.  Provide    adjustment    for    one    set    of    center    panel 

diagonals  in  pin  connected  trusses. 

12.  Avoid  making  columns  in  one  story  lengths. 

13.  Use  fillers  or  change  design  to  avoid  crimping  long 

flange  angles. 

14.  Change  special  to  standard  fittings  for  gas  pipe  railing. 

See  page  6.4. 

15.  Change    complicated    built-bolsters,    pedestals    and 

shoes  to  cast  shoes,  using  one  of  the  standard  types 
for  which  we  have  the  patterns  or  for  which  new 
patterns  would  be  cheap. 


6  THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 

1.  Built-up  members  should  be  made  of  as  few  different 

sections  as  possible.  Eliminate,  therefore,  bars  on 
the  bottom  flanges  of  chords  and  excessive  number 
of  webs  or  sidfe  plates. 

2.  Substitute  cast  iron  for  cast  steel  in  castings  which 

carry  practically  no  stress. 

3.  Change  rail  grillages  to  cast  steel  bases,  the  grooves 

in  the  top  of  the  castings  to  be  cored  and  not  planed. 

•.T,  TTTTTiTTTTT  ,-nnnnnnnr^ 

4.  Do  not  use  gas  pipe  railing  where  angle  railing  will 

answer. 

5.  Avoid  the  use  of  cover  plates  on  small  plate  and 

angle  columns,  also  reinforcing  plates  on  backs  of 
channels  and  plate  and  channel  columns. 

Materials  to  be  Ordered  Promptly 

6.  Special    care    should    be   taken   that   the   following 

miscellaneous  materials  are  ordered  promptly  so  as 
not  to  delay  the  delivery: 

Eyebars  and  pins. 

All  castings  and  forgings. 

Malleable  and  other  special  fittings. 

Wrought  iron. 

Checkered  plates. 

Shafting. 

Buckle  plates. 

Gas  pipe  railing. 

Field  bolts  in  large  quantities. 

Sheet  lead. 

Lumber. 

Sheet  steel  and  fittings. 

Lag  screws. 

Hardware  fittings. 

Windows  and  doors. 

Special  rivets  and  bolts.     See  page  14.1. 

Framed  Beams  and  Channels 

7.  For  buildings,  beams  and  channels  framing  between 

beams  or  channels  should  be  ordered  V/^'  less  than 
the  distance  center  to  center  of  beams  or  channels 
into  which  they  frame. 


THE    ORDERING    OF    MATERIAL  7 

Framed  Beams  and  Channels — Continued 

1.  For  buildings,  beams  and  channels  framing  between 

columns  or  riveted  girders  should  be  ordered  Y%'  to 
l5Ae"  less  than  the  distance  between  metal  of 
columns  or  girders  into  which  they  frame. 

2.  Beams  and  channels  (not  finished)  for  bridge  work, 

when  permitted  by  the  customer,  should  be  billed 
Y%'  to  ^/g"  short. 

3.  When  ordering  beams  or  channels  in  approximate,  or 

in  multiple  lengths,  the  shop  limitations  for  cutting 

should  be  considered. 
Ambridge   Plant   can  shear  any   Carnegie  beam   or 

channel,  except  the  supplementary  beams  B61  to 

B68. 
Gary  Plant  can  shear  any  Carnegie  beam  or  channel 

with  a  web  not  thicker  than  y%'  except  the  sup- 
plementary beams  B61  to  B68. 
Pencoyd  Plant  cannot  shear  but  must  saw  or  block 

off  all  beams  and  channels. 

4.  Beams  and  channels  vertically  beveled  at  ends,  such 

as  rafters,  should  be  ordered  long  to  allow  for 
cutting  in  shop.  If  beveled  at  one  end,  add  1"; 
if  beveled  at  both  ends,  add  2". 


5.     Short  beams  which  have  to  be  sawed  may  be  ordered 
in  multiple  lengths. 


If  lengths  of  beams  or  channels  in  the  preceding 
cases  work  out  in  fractions  smaller  than  J^", 
increase  or  decrease  to  the  nearest  half  inch,  so 
that  the  ordered  lengths  will  be  in  inches  or  half 
inches. 

If  cases  arise  where  it  becomes  necessary  to  order 
lengths  involving  quarter  inches,  a  special  note 
calling  attention  to  it  should  be  added  on  advance 
bill  so  that  the  Order  Office  will  not  change  the 
lengths  to  even  half  inches. 


8  THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 

Purlins  and  Crane  Runway  Beams 

1.  Continuous  lines  of  beams  or  channels,  such  as  purlins 

resting  on  top  chords  of  trusses  or  crane  runway 
beams  resting  on  brackets,  should  be  ordered  I" 
less  than  distance  center  to  center  of  columns  or 
trusses  and  the  length  of  beams  increased  or 
decreased  to  the  nearest  half  inch. 

2.  Runway  beams  where  wheel  or  trolley  rests  directly 

on  flange  of  beams  should  be  ordered  with  allowance 
for  finishing.  Finished  length  should  be  Y%'  less 
than  center  to  center  distance. 

3.  Angles,  tees  and  zees  used  as  purlins  should  be  ordered 

1"  less  than  distance  center  to  center  of  trusses,  if 
detail  will  permit,  and  lengths  increased  or  decreased 
to  the  nearest  half  inch. 

Plate  Girders  and  Chord  Sections 

4.  The  following  instructions  for  ordering  material  for 

plate  girders  and  chord  sections  apply  to  all  classes 
of  work,  except  when  customer's  specifications 
advise  to  the  contrary. 

5.  In  general  the  distance  back  to  back  of  flange  angles 

should  be  made  Yd'  greater  than  the  width  of  web 
plate.  The  width  of  web  plate  should  be  in  even 
inches  and  the  fractional  width  back  to  back  of 
angles. 

6.  For  bridge  girders  without  covers  an  excess  of  J£" 

should  be  used  instead  of  Yd '  • 

7.  For  building  work  the  length  of  web  plates  for  girders 

not  finished  should  appear  on  advance  bill  J/£"  less 
than  over-all  dimensions. 

8.  If  spliced,   Yi'  less  than  distance  between  splices. 

The  usual  %"  should  appear  in  the  "Trim"  column. 

9.  For  railroad  bridge  work,  web  plates  should  be  ordered 

neat  length  and  %"  added  for  trim. 

10.  Cover  plates  should  be  ordered  neat  length  and  %" 

added  for  trim. 

11.  Flange  angles  should  be  ordered  neat  length  and  24" 

added  for  trim. 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL  9 

Plate  Girders  and  Chord  Sections — Continued 

1.  Short  reinforcing  web  plates,  web  splice  plates  and 

fillers  for  building  work  should  be  billed  and  ordered 
3/2"  less  than  distance  between  flange  angles,  due 
allowance  being  made  for  over-run  of  angles.  Long 
reinforcing  webs  for  either  building  or  bridge  work 
should  be  billed  a  width  equal  to  the  distance 
between  flange  angles  less  at  least  3/2",  due  allow- 
ance being  made  for  over-run  of  angles. 

2.  Fillers  for  railroad  bridge  work  should  be  billed  and 

ordered  J/£"  less  than  distance  between  flange 
angles;  splice  plates  should  be  billed  and  ordered 
exact  distance  between  flange  angles,  no  allowance 
being  made  for  over-run  of  angles. 

3.  Stiffeners  with  fillers  should  be  ordered  neat  length. 

Crimped  stiffeners  should  be  billed  neat  length  on 
advance  bill;  in  "Trim"  column  add  the  depth  of. 
crimp  plus  3/2"  f°r  each  crimp.  Stiffeners  at 
important  bearing  points  are  finished  and  should 
be  ordered  y%'  longer  than  finished  length. 

Roof  Trusses 

4.  Main  chord  angles  should  be  ordered  %"  longer  than 

exact  length.  On  advance  bills  give  exact  length 
plus  %"  in  "Trim"  column.  When  web  members 
are  scaled,  add  IJ/^"  to  scaled  length,  but  if  scale 
drawings  are  sufficiently  accurate  the  above  allow- 
ance may  be  reduced. 

Pins 

5.  Bill  on  advance  bills  the  finished  diameter  and  length 

of  pins  and  note  in  "Remarks"  column  "Finished 
Dimensions."  Order  Office  will  make  proper 
allowances.  See  pages  47.2,  48.3  and  48.5. 

Shafting 

6.  State  definitely  on  advance  bills  whether  rough,  cold 

drawn,  cold  rolled  or  turned  and  polished  shafting 
is  required. 

7.  The  American  Steel  &  Wire  Co.   can  furnish  cold 

drawn  shafting  up  to  and  including  4^.6  inch 
diameter. 

8.  Exact  lengths  between  5  ft.  and  24  ft.  can  be  obtained 

without  extra  charge. 


1O  THE  ORDERING   OF    MATERIAL 

Shafting — Continued 

1.  Turned    and    polished   shafting   should   be   specified 

above  4^6  inch  diameter. 

2.  Cold  rolled  shafting  should  not  be  specified  except 

when  absolutely  necessary. 
Allowances  for  finishing,  page  47f.2. 

Rockers,  Rollers  and  Special  Forgings 

3.  Rockers  and  rollers  should  be  billed  exact  size  on  the 

advance  bills  and  note  in  " Remarks"  column, 
"  Finished  Dimensions."  Add  a  sketch  if  any 
doubt  exists  as  to  which  surfaces  of  rockers  are  to 
be  finished.  Special  forgings  are  to  be  ordered 
from  detail  drawings.  Allowance  for  ordering  page 
47.2,  48.3,  and  48.5. 

Milling,  Planing  and  Finishing 

4.  For    material    which    requires    milling,    planing    or 

finishing  on  the  ends,  such  as  the  main  sections  of 
columns,  floor  beams,  stringers  and  chords,  allow 
1/2"  for  finishing  one  end  or  %"  for  finishing  both 
ends. 

5.  On  advance  bills  give  the  finished  length   and   put 

the  proper  "add"  in  the  "Mill"  column. 

6.  For  stiff  enters  which  require  finishing,  see  page  9.3. 

7.  For  base,  sole  and  masonry  plates  which  require  a 

finished  surface,  see  page  47.4. 

8.  Before  ordering  plates  to  be  planed,  consult  Plant 

Engineer  to  see  if  plates  straightened  at  the  plant 
can  be  substituted  for  planed  plates. 

9.  Plates  planed  on  edges  are  to  be  ordered  neat  size 

and  "fin.  1  edge"  or  "fin.  2  edges,"  as  required, 
noted  in  "Remarks"  column.  For  amount  to  be 
added,  see  page  47.3. 

10.  For  standard  and  similar  floor  beams  some  plants 

finish  the  abutting  edges  at  the  joint  of  the  end 
and  center  webs.  Consult  fabricating  plant  as  to 
what  is  required. 

11.  When  nature  of  detail  requires  finishing  of  ends  of 

members  after  end  angles  are  riveted  on,  or  when 
plant  practice  requires  such  finishing,  end  angles 
should  have  sufficient  thickness  for  finishing. 
Consult  fabricating  plant. 


THE   ORDERING   OF    MATERIAL 


11 


Bending 

1.  When  possible  the  radii  of  all  circular  bends  should 

be  multiples  of  3",  and  standard  forms  used. ' 

2.  When  possible  radius  should  not  be  less  than  three 

times  the  width  of  the  leg  in  the  plane  of  bending. 

The. lengths  referred  to  in  the  following  are  lengths 
on  center  of  gravity  lines  and  are  approximate. 


3.  Add  3"  to  required 

length  for  each 
bend. 

In  case  of  large 
duplication, 
consult  fabricat- 
ing plant. 

4.  Add  6"  to  required 

length  or  consult 
fabricating 
plant. 

In  case  of  large 
duplication, 
consult  fabricat- 
ing plant. 

5.  Add  6"  to  required 

length  or  consult 
fabricating 
plant. 

In  case  of  large 
duplication 
consult  fabricat- 
ing plant. 

6.  Consult  fabricating 

plant  for  allow- 
ances to  be  made, 
advising  them  of 
the  number  of 
pieces  required 
and  the  radius. 


12 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 


Bending — Continued 

1 .  Consult  fabricating 

plant  for  allow- 
ances to  be  made, 
advising  them  of 
the  number  of 
pieces  required 
and  the  radius 
and  thickness  of 
web. 

2.  Consult  fabricating 

plant  for  allow- 
ances to  be  made, 
advising  them  of 
the  number  of 
pieces  required, 
the  angle  of  bend 
and  thickness  of 
web. 


3.  Use  bent  plates 
when  "A"  ex- 
ceeds 3". 


Sketch  Plates 

4.  The  instructions   given   below   for   ordering   sketch 

plates  are  to  be  followed  only  when  fabricating 
plant  has  the  necessary  facilities  for  shearing. 

5.  Consult  equipment  of  fabricating  plant. 

6.  Plates  3  feet  and  over  in  length  are  to  be  ordered 

sketch   when   the   waste,   if   ordered   rectangular, 
exceeds  20%. 

7.  On  mill  order,  dimensions  of  sketch  plates  should  be 

given  in  inches. 

8.  Do  not  order  sketch  plates  with  re-entrant  or  circular 

cuts. 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 


13 


Sketch  Plates— Continued 

Plates  with  beveled  cuts  should  be  detailed  as  shown 
in  fig.  13.1,  so  that  they  can  be  ordered  in  multiple 
lengths  without  unnecessary  waste  in  shearing. 


1. 


2. 


If   bevel   is 
less    than 


point  will  curl  in  shearing  and  should  be  shown  cut  off 
on  detail  drawing.  When  plates  of  irregular  shape 
can  be  combined  to  advantage,  show  sketch  on 
advance  bill,  thus: 


3.     If  wing  plates  are  to  be  ordered  as  per  fig.  13.1,  detail 

.  them  as  per  fig.  13.3.     Angles  at  base  or  cap  can 

then  be  cut  square. 


Field  Rivets  and  Bolts 

4.  When   not  otherwise  specified,   order  10%,  plus  10 

rivets  in  excess  of  actual  number  required,  and  5% 
plus  5  bolts  in  excess  of  actual  number  of  rough 
bolts  required.  Order  exact  number  of'  turned 
bolts  required,  except  for  large  quantities,  when 
Plant  Engineer  should  be  consulted. 

5.  When  orders  are  divided  between  two  or  more  plants, 

the  field  rivets  and  bolts  should  be  ordered  and 
furnished  by  the  plant  fabricating  the  riveted  work. 

6.  In  ordering  bolts,  specify  the  grip  and  length. 

7.  In  ordering  bolts  with  countersunk  heads,  specify  that 

heads  must  fit  countersink  of  holes  in  which  they 
are  used.  When  these  bolts  are  ordered  from  an 
outside  company,  dimensions  of  the  heads  should 
be  given. 

8.  Bolts  attaching  riveted  work  to  castings  should  be 

ordered  long  enough  to  project  Y^'  outside  of  nuts 
to  take  care  of  over-run  of  castings. 


14  THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 

Special  Rivets  and  Bolts 

1.  When  an  order  requires  nickel-steel  rivets,  iron  rivets 

or  bolts,  steel  rivets  or  bolts  under  Yz'  diameter 
or  steel  rivets  over  %"  diameter,  the  Order  Office 
should  be  furnished  with  the  approximate  weight 
at  the  time  the  balance  of  material  is  ordered. 
See  page  6.6. 

Fitting=up  Bolts  for  Erection 

2.  When  fitting-up  bolts  are  furnished,  the  number  of 

each  grip  should  be  as  follows: 

3.  Building  Work:     30%  of  field  rivets. 

4.  Bridge  Work:     Floor  system  and  tension  members, 

80%  of  field  rivets;  laterals  and  compression 
members,  50%  of  field  rivets. 

5.  Vary  lengths  by  Yi'  and  supply  two  */%'  washers  with 

each  bolt. 

6.  Fitting-up  bolts  should  not  be  furnished  unless  called 

for. 

Tie=rods  and  Sag=rods 

7.  In   ordering  tie-rods   or  sag-rods,   when   cold  rolled 

threads   may   be   used   state   on   advance   bill   in 
" Remarks"  column  " Cold-rolled  threads  may  be 
used."     See  page  50.4 
f. 
Buckle  Plates 

8.  The    following    instructions    cover    the    ordering    of 

buckle  plates  manufactured  at  the  Ambridge  Plant, 
American  Bridge  Co.: 

9.  The  gateways  to  the  buckle  plate  press  are  11"  wide 

facing  lengthwise  with  the  shop  and  94"  wide  facing 
across  the  shop.  Plates  which  go  through  the  71" 
gateway  can  be  handled  up  to  40'  in  length.  No 
plate  over  12'  in  length  can  be  handled  through 
the  94"  gateway. 

10.  The  maximum  sheared  widths  of  buckle  plates  that 
can  be  punched  and  sheared  on  the  multiple  punches 
are: 

Machine  No.  1 :     54J^"  wide. 
Machine  No.  2:     60"      wide. 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 


16 


Buckle  Plates — Continued 

1.  On  punch  in  the  Barge  Shop  (close  to  the  Forge  Shop 

where  plates  are  buckled).,  sheared  plates  up  to  96" 
wide,  883/2"  center  to  center  holes,  can  be  punched. 

2.  In   ordering  material  add   1"  to   finished  width   of 

buckle  plate  for  plates  up  to  25  ft.  long  and  IJ^"  to 
finished  width  for  plates  above  25  ft.  long.  For 
length  of  plate  add  to  finished  length  %"  x  number 
of  buckles.  When  only  one  buckle  occurs  in  a 
plate,  add  I"  to  finished  length.  When  flanges 
along  the  sides  of  the  plate  are  of  unequal  width, 
the  material  should  be  ordered  wide  enough  to 
make  two  flanges  of  the  greater  width,  the  narrower 
flange  to  be  sheared  to  finished  width  after  buckling. 


Width 

Ordered  Width 


3.     If  standard  plate  dies  cannot  be  used,  consult  Plant 
Engineer. 


Watertight  Work  «^ 

4.  All  sheared  plates  not  bevel-sheared  should  be  ordered 

net  width  plus  Y^' . 

5.  All  sheared  plates  over  %"  thick  which  are  to  be  bevel- 

sheared  should  be  ordered  net  width  plus  %" . 

6.  U.  M.  plates  not  bevel-sheared  and  under  20  ft.  long 

should  be  ordered  net  width. 

7.  U.  M.  plates  20  ft.  or  more  in  length  should  be  ordered 

net  width  plus  Y^'  or  if  bevel-sheared,  net  width 
plus  %!'. 

8.  All  plates  should  be  ordered  net  length  plus  %" . 

9.  Plates  %e"  thick  or  less  require    no    extra  material 

for  crimping;  for  plates  over  7A.Qr  thick,  add  to  the 
width  or  length  Vie"  for  each  crimp. 


16  THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 

Rails  and  Splice  Bars 

1.  Give  section  number  and  weight  per  yard. 

2.  Specify    material:     "  Manufacturers'     Standard    for 

Rails/' 

3.  Rails  ordered  from  Carnegie  Steel  Company  should  be 

specified  in  30  ft.  lengths  for  sections  under  50  Ib. 
per  yard,  and  in  either  30  ft.  or  33  ft.  lengths  for 
sections  50  Ib.  per  yard  and  over.  Rails  ordered 
from  Illinois  Steel  Co.  should  be  specified  in  30  ft. 
lengths  for  sections  under  56  Ib.  per  yard,  and  in 
33  ft.  lengths  for  sections  56  Ib.  per  yard  and  over. 

4.  When  it  is  practicable,  mills  should  have  the  privilege 

of  shipping  the  rails  in  either  30  ft.  or  33  ft.  lengths. 
End  pieces  only  should  be  ordered  in  odd  lengths. 

5.  On  rush  orders  the  mills  can  often  make  quicker 

deliveries  if  the  rails  are  ordered  in  lines  and  they 
are  given  the  option  of  using  odd  lengths. 

6.  Order  all  rails  first  quality. 

7.  Specify    " Standard    Carnegie    drilling   in   ends"    or 

"Standard  Illinois  Steel  Co.  drilling  in  ends." 

8.  Standard  drilling  in  ends  is  the  only  drilling  that  is 

done  by  the  rail  mills  and  no  sketch  is  required  for 
this  drilling. 

9.  All  special  drilling  must  be  done  by  the  fabricating 

plant. 

10.  In  general,  holes  for  crane  stops  should  be  drilled  in 

the  fi^ld. 

11.  In  general  rails  for  the  ends  of  draw-bridges  should 

be  ordered  with  no  drilling. 

12.  If    any    drilling    other    than    standard    is    required, 

specifiy:     "  Rails  to  be  shipped  to Plant;" 

if  no  drilling  is  to  be  done  at  the  fabricating  plant, 
specify  after  consulting  Plant  Engineer:  "Rails 
may  be  shipped  direct  to  site." 

13.  When  standard  rail  splice  bars  are  required,  bill  on 

the  advance  bill  the  number  of  pairs  required  with 
bolts,  also  if  rails  have  standard  drilling  specify: 
"Standard  Carnegie  drilling"  or  "Standard  Illinois 
Steel  Co.  drilling." 

14.  When  ordering  rail  splices  requiring  bond  wires  for 

trolley  lines  on  highway  bridges,  see  that  the  type 
of  bar  specified  will  allow  wire  to  go  between  splice 
bar  and  web  of  rail. 


THE  ORDERING    OF   MATERIAL  17 

Extras    for    Structural    Material.     (Compiled   from 
list  published  July  1,  1916.     Subject  to  change) 

1.  The  following  shapes  and  plates  can  be  obtained  at 

the  base  price  of  structural  steel: 

Beams  and  Channels:     3"  to  15",  inc. 
Angles:  3"  on  one  or  both  legs  x  Y^'  to  6"  x  6". 
Plates :     6}£"  x  J£"  to  100"  x  J£"  or  thicker,  inc. 
Rounds  and  Squares:     %"  to  WIQ",  inc. 
Flats:     1"  to  6"  x  Y*'  to  1",  inc. 
No  charge  for  cutting  to  lengths  3  ft.  and  over. 

2.  The  following  shapes  and  plates  can  be  obtained  at 

the  base  price,  plus  the  extra  per  pound : 

Beams  over  15" lOc 

Angles  over  6"  (one  or  both  legs) lOc 

Angles  3"  on  one  or  both  legs  and  less 

than  Yd'  thick 35c 

Angles  W  x  1^"  to  2^"  x  2^",  inc., 

and  more  than  Y%'  thick lOc 

Tees 05c  to  .20c 

Bulb  Angles  and  Bulb  Beams 30c 

Plates  less  than  J4"  thick  to  3/i6"  thick,  inc.  .lOc 
Plates  less  than  3/i6"  thick  to  No.  8  gauge,  inc.  .15c 

Plates  No.  9  and  No.  10  gauge 30c 

Plates  No.  11  gauge  and  £fc"  thick 35c 

Plates  No.  12  gauge 40c 

Flats  1"  to  6",  inc.,  x  J£"  to  5/i6" lOc 

Flats  \yj'  to  6",  inc.,  x  3/i6" 20c 

Flats  \Yi'  to  6",  inc.,  x  J^" 30c 

Plates  over  100"  to  110"  wide,  inc 05c 

Plates  over  110"  to  115"  wide,  inc lOc 

Plates  over  115"  to  120"  wide,  inc 15c 

Plates  over  120"  to  125"  wide,  inc/ 25c 

Plates  over  125"  to  130"  wide,  inc 50c 

Plates  over  130"  wide l.OOc 

Cutting  to  lengths  under  3'  to  2',  inc 25c 

Cutting  to  lengths  under  2'  to  1',  inc 50c 

Cutting  to  lengths  under  1' 1.55c 

Cutting  to  exact  length  (within  f/s") 15c 

Sketch  PL  (not  more  than  4  cuts)  3'  and 

over .lOc 

Sketch  PL  (not  more  than  4  cuts)   under 

3'  to  2',  inc 35c 

Sketch  PL  (not  more  than  4  cuts)  under 

2'  to  I',  inc 60c 

Sketch  PL  (not  more  than  4  cuts)  under  1'. .  1.65c 
Sketch  pi.  (more  than  4  cuts)  add  to  foregoing  .lOc 


18  THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 

Paint. 

1.  The  Engineering  Department  will  not  order  any  field 

or  shop  paint.  This  will  be  done  by  the  Operating 
Department. 

2.  Quantity  of  shop  paint  and  field  paint  for  all  classes 

of  work  should  be  estimated  upon  the  basis  of  .25 
gallon  per  ton  for  one  coat  and  .40  gallon  per  ton 
for  two  coats. 

When   figuring   by    surface,    assume   that   one 
gallon  of  paint  will  cover  400  square  feet. 

3.  STORES— PENCOYD  PLANT 

Rivets y%'  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Bolts. %"  dia.  to  1"  dia.  Hex.  Head  and 

Nut, 

Stove  Bolts • .  .TV  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Tap  Bolts %"  dia.  to  %"  dia.  Hex.  Head. 

Csk.  Bolts %"  dia.  x  tfff'  Ig.    for    A.    B.    Co. 

Name  Plate. 

'Hex.   Nuts .  .  y8"  dia.  to  2^"  dia. 

Pilot  Nuts \yj'  dia.  to  6"  dia.  Screw,  long  and 

short,    PL8    to     PL44,     PS8     to 

PS  44. 
Driving  Nuts iy2"  dia.  to  6"  dia.  Screw,  PD3   to 

PD  15. 

Machine  Screws Practically  all  sizes. 

Wood  Screws,  Csk. .  .Practically  all  sizes. 

Lag  Screws ^£"  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Gov't  Anchors %"  dia.  x  1'  6". 

Drift  Pins ft"  dia-  to  H"  dia. 

Railroad  Spikes y2"  dia.  x  4^";  %"  dia.  x  6". 

Boat  Spikes J^"  dia,  x  10". 

Wire  Nails 2d.  4d,  6d,  8d,  lOd,  20d,  30d,  60d  and 

7"  Spikes. 

Cut  Washers 

Bevel  Washers 1/4"  sq.  x  Ty  at  center. 

C.  I.  Ogee  Washers,  .for  %",  %",  %"  dia.  bolts. 

Gas  Pipe I"  dia.  for  Separators. 

Turntable  Discs 7",  8",  9",  10"  dia.  Steel  and  Bronze 

(with  y%'  tapped  hole). 

Split  Cotters Practically  all  sizes. 

Rivet  Die  Steel 5%"  x  4Ji";  6"  x  6";  8"  x  8"  (5;  6" 

long). 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL  19 

1.     STORES— ELMIRA  PLANT 

Rivets ....  .y^'  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Bolts Y2"  dia.  to  %"  dia.  Hex.  Head  and 

Nut. 

Bolts .,  ;•..-.  .y%'  dia.  to  J£"  dia.  Button  Head  and 

Hex.  Nut. 
Hex.  Nuts. .  ...;.-,..  yj'  to  2J^"  tap. 

Skewbacks A.  B.  Co.  Standard. 

U  Plates .  A.  B.  Co.  Standard. 

Standard  Stubs Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4. 

Name  Plates A.  B.  Co.  Standard  Al  and  A3. 

Washers,  Cut 

Beveled..  .  .1%"  square,  -f$"  at  center. 

C.  I. 
Beveled.  .A  11,  12,  13,  14. 

Skewback. .  A  81,  82,  83,  84,  85,  86. 

Ys"  Plate,  .for  y2",  %" ',  %" ,  %"  and  I"  bolts. 

Ogee  C.  I.  .for  %"  bolts. 


2.     STORES— TRENTON  PLANT 

Rivets.  . .  ..f %",  %",  %"  and  %"  dia. 

Bolts Y^'  dia.  to  y^'  dia.  Hex.  Head  and 

Nut. 
Chain 1"  to 


3.     STORES—  EDGE  MOOR  PLANT 

Rivets.  .  .  0  \h....%"  dia.  and  y8"  dia. 

Bolts."  .............  %"  dia.  and  %"  dia. 

Conical  Roller  SteeL.S^",  5",  6/r  rounds. 
Hook  Steel  .........  1^",  1M",  2 


7/  rounds. 

Gas  Pipe  Railing  Fittings. 
Turntable  Number  Plates. 


2O  THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 

1.     STORES— AMBRIDGE  PLANT 

Rivets y8"  dia.  to  I"  dia. 

Bolts %"  dia.  to  I"  dia. 

Stove  Bolts 

Hook  Bolts iy2"  and  2^"  hook. 

Pilot  Nuts PL  8  to  PL  44— 1J^"  dia.  to  6"  dia. 

Screw. 

Pilot  Nuts PS  8  to  PS  44— 1^"   dia.  to  6"  dia. 

Screw. 

Driving  Nuts PD3   to  PD  l$—iy2"  dia.  to  6"  dia. 

Screw. 

Lomas  Nuts PN  21  to  PN  33— 1^"  dia.  to  6"  dia. 

Screw. 

Sleeve  Nuts y8"  tap  to  4%"  tap. 

Turnbuckles %"  tap  to  5^"  tap. 

Clevises .  .No.  3  to  No.  7. 

U  Plates A.  B.  Co.  Standard  A  and  B. 

Skewback A.  B.  Co.  Standard  A,  B  and  C. 

Gov't  Anchors %"  dia.  x  1'  6". 

Name  Plates A.  B.  Co.  Standard  Al,  3,  4,  5. 

Year  Plates A.  B.  Co.  Standard  A 10. 

Patent  Plates A  874. 

Gas  Pipe 

Railing  Fittings  (gas  pipe)  Ls,  Tees,  Crosses  and  Caps. 
Turntable  Centers. .  .  Common  Standard  80  ft. 

Parts Piper  center. 

Nickel    Steel  Tread   Plates     NT  408,    NT  409, 
C5104. 

Rail  Clamps A  21  to  A  24  C.  S. 

Washers,  Cut 

Pencoyd  Bevel. 

Check A  11  to  A  14. 

Lateral...  .A  81  to  A  86. 

Ogee A  91  to  A93,  Patt.  2937. 

Eccentric.. W  2  and  W  3. 
Fastenings  for  Corrugated  Steel — Black  and  Galvanized. 

Lag  Screws ^",  %",  %",   I"  dia.  x  3"  to  12" 

Cone  Point. 
Spikes. 
Cotters. 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL  21 

1.     STORES— CANTON  PLANT 

Rivets Y%'  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Bolts Yz"  dia.  to  1J£"  dia.  Hex.  Head  and 

Nut. 

Stove  Bolts Y^'  dia. 

Hex.  Nuts y2"-to  2J4"  tap. 

Sheeting  Rivets He"  x  y8"  and  ^"  Black. 

Wire  Nails .  .8d,  lOd,  16d,  20d,  30d,  40d,  50d,  60d. 

Lag  Screws y8"  x  3^"  to  >£"  x  VI". 

Cotters He"  to  j/£"  dia. 

Cut  Washers 

Turnbuckles %",  I",  iy8",  l^ff  tap. 

Bevel  Washers ^tte"  and  13/i6"  holes. 

O.  G.  Washers A  91  and  A  92. 

C.  I.  Bevel  Washers.  .A  11,  12,  13  and  14. 
Skewback  Washers.  .A  81,  82,  83,  84,  85,  86. 

U  Plates A  and  B. 

Skewbacks A  and  B. 

Gas  Pipe 1"  dia.  for  Separators. 


2.     STORES— SHIFFLER  PLANT 

Rivets yj'  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Bolts y^'  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Stove  Bolts J£"  dia.  and  %,"  dia. 

Csk.  Head  Bolts.  .  .  .  J#'  dia.  to  %!'  dia.,  l^"  to  2^r/  Ig. 

Cut  Washers 

Bevel  Washers 

Ogee  Washers ,, 

Name  Plates A.  B.  Co.  Standard  A  1  and  A  3. 

Lag  Screws %"  dia.,  3",  4"  and  6"  Ig. 

5/s"  dia.,  3",  4"  and  6"  Ig. 

K"  dia,  1J/T  to  5"  Ig. 

Sleeve  Nuts iy%"  tap  to  1^"  tap. 

Turnbuckles 1^"  tap  to  1J4"  tap. 

Clevises No.  3,  No.  4  and  No.  5. 

Gov't  Anchors %"  dia.  x  I'  6"  Ig. 

Rail  Clamps A  21  and  A  22  C.  S. 

Gas  Pipe I"  dia.  for  Separators. 

Galvanized  Fastenings  for  Corrugated  Sheeting  and  Flashing. 


22  THE  ORDERING   OF   MATERIAL 

1.     STORES— TOLEDO  PLANT 

Rivets %"  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Bolts y2"  dia.  to  7/8"  dia.  up  to  5"  Ig. 

Verona  Nut  Locks.. .  24"  to  1". 

Ogee  Washers for  %"t  %"  and  %"  dia.  bolts. 

Cut  Washers for  %" ,  %",  %"  and  %"  dia.  bolts. 

Cotters i>& 

Name  Plates A.  B.  Co.  Standard  A  1  and  A  3. 

Gas  Pipe %"  dia.  to  2"  dia. 


2.     STORES— GARY  PLANT 

Rivets ^",  w,  s/ie",  w,  y2",  *A",  %", 

%"  and  I"  dia. 
Bolts y8",  %"  and  %"  dia.  up  to  12"  Ig.; 

1"  dia.  up  to  6"  Ig.    Hex.  Head  and 

Nut. 

Bolts J4"  to  y2"  dia.  Square  Head  and  Nut. 

Stove  Bolts 9ie"  to  Y%"  dia.  Round  Head. 

Stove  Bolts K"  to  */£'  dia.  Flat  Head. 

Verona  Nut  Locks. .  .for  y^'  to  1J£"  dia.  Bolts. 

Bevel  Washers A  11,  A  12,  A  14. 

Ogee  Washers A  91,  A  92,  A  93. 

Cut  Washers 

Nuts ........Hex.  and  Square,    }^"   to   3"   U.    S. 

Standard  tap. 

Name  Plates A.  B.  Co.  Standard  A  1,  A  3. 

Year  Plates A.  B.  Co.  Standard  A  10. 

Railing  Fittings  (Gas  Pipe)  Ls,  Tees,  Crosses,  Globe  Ls, 
Floor  Flanges  and  N.  T.  Co.'s  Fittings. 

Cap  Screws y^'  dia.  to  1  J#'  dia.  up  to  5"  Ig. 

Lag  Screws Y%'  dia.  to  %"  dia.  up  to  10"  Ig. 

Set  Screws J£"  dia.  to  1"  dia.  up  to  7"  Ig. 

Cotters 

Flat  Head  Closing  Rivets;  Black  and  Galvanized,  3/ie"  and 
y^'  dia.  x  3^"  and  y2"  long. 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL  23 

1.     STORES— AMERICAN  PLANT 

Rivets YS"  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Bolts y8"  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Stove  Bolts 3/i6"  dia.  to  ^"  dia. 

Hex.  and  Square  ', 

Nuts %"  to  2%"  tap. 

Lomas  Nuts 1^"  to  4^"  tap,  PN  21  to  PN  27. 

Name  Plates Standard  A.  B.  Co. 

Year  Plates Standard  A.  B.  Co. 

Cotters All  sizes. 

Cut  Washers 

Bevel  Washers. . .  .;V;\  ' 

Lock  Washers for  Y^'  dia.  to  Y%'  dia.  bolts. 

Boat  Spikes ^"  x  9". 

Gas  Pipe %"  dia.  and  1'"  dia.  for  Separators. 

Set  and  Cap  Screws.. }£'  dia.  to  %"  dia.  up  to  3"  Ig. 


2.     STORES— DETROIT  PLANT 

Rivets Y%"  dia.  to  1"  dia. 

Bolts %"  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Hex.  Nuts Y2"  tap  to  2J4"  tap. 

Cut  Washers 

Bevel  Washers 

Name  Plates. A.  B.  Co.  Standard. 

Wood  Screws All  sizes. 

Wire  Nails .  .  .  All  sizes. 


3.     STORES— ST.  Louis  PLANT 

Rivets yj'  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Bolts. up  to  1"  dia. 

Stove  Bolts 

Hex.  and  Square 

Nuts Y2"  tap  to  2K"  tap. 

Turnbuckles up  to  2"  tap. 

Lomas  Nuts PN  21  to  PN  24,  1^"  dia.  to  3"  dia. 

tap. 

Gas  Pipe for  Separators. 

Cut  Washers.  . 


24  THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 

1.     STORES— MINNEAPOLIS  PLANT 

Rivets y%"  dia.  to  J/s"  dia. 

Bolts,  Hex.  Head  . . .%"  dia.  to  J-g"  1"  to  20"  lg. 

Bolts,  Round  Head.  .H"  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Csk.  Bolts %"  dia.  and  %"  dia. 

Carriage  Bolts J£"  dia.  to  ^6"  dia. 

Stove  Bolts,  Flat- 
head 3/i6"  dia.  to  y8"  dia. 

Stove  Bolts,  Round- 
head  %e"  dia.  to  3^"  dia. 

Plow  Bolts y8"  dia.  and  Y2"  dia. 

Hex.  Nuts Y%"  dia.  to  3r/  dia. 

Square  Tap  Nuts.. .  .%"  dia.  to  2^"  dia. 

Exp.  Nuts %"  dia.  to  %*  dia. 

Lock  Washers %"  dia.  and  %x/  dia. 

O.  G.  Washers 

Cut  Washers J£"  dia.  to  %"  dia. 

Pin  Fillers J^"  th.  for  pins  2/r  dia.  to  3J^"  dia 

Pin  Nuts PN  21,  PN  22,  PN  23. 

Turnbuckles "  dia.  to  2%"  dia. 


THE   ORDERING   OF   MATERIAL 


MAXIMUM  LENGTHS  OF  SHAPES  ROLLED  BY  CARNEGIE  MILLS 


BEAMS 

24"  to  12"  .................  75' 

10"  to  5"  .................  70' 

4"  and  3"  ...........  .  .....  50' 

CHANNELS 

15",  13"  and  12"  ..........  75' 

10"  .......................  70' 

10"  Special  ................  80' 

9"  to  5"  ..................  70' 

4"  and  3"  .................  50' 

ANGLES 
Equal  Legs 

8"x8"  ...................  120' 

6"x6"xl"toK"  ........  80' 

6"  x  6"  x  %"  and  under  ...  90' 

5"x5"  ....................  85' 

4"x4"  ...................  90' 

3^"x3K"  ...............  90' 

3"x3"  ...................  75' 

2^"x2^"  ...............  50' 

2"x2"  ...................  50' 

lM"xl%"  ...............  50' 

WxlK"  .....  -  .........  50' 

WxlM"  ...............  50' 

l"xl"  ...................  50' 


ANGLES 
Unequal  Legs 


8"x6" 


6"x4"xl"to%" 

6"  x  4"  x  %"  and  under.. 

6"  x  3^"  x  1"  to  %" 


80' 
80' 
85' 
85' 
90' 
80' 
6"x3^"x%"  ............  85' 

6"  x  3^"  x  y±"  and  under.  .  90' 
5"x4"  ....................  90' 

5"x3^"xK"  ............  75' 

5"x3^"x%"  ............  80' 

5"  x  3^"  x  %"  and  under.  .  90' 
5"x3"..  .  90' 


4^"x3"x%"  ............  50' 

4^"x3"xM"  ............  55' 

4^"x3"x%"  ............   60' 

4^"x3"x^"  ............  65' 

43^"x3"x%"  ............  70' 

4^"  x  3"  x  y2"  and  under..  80' 
4"x3^"  .................  90' 

4"x3"x%"  ..............  85' 

4"  x  3"  x%"  and  under....  90' 

3^"x3"x%"  ............  60' 

3^"x3"xM"  .........  ...  65' 

3^"x3"x%"  ............  70' 

3^"x3"x^"  ............  75' 

3^"  x  3"  x  W  and  under..  80' 
3^"x2^"x%"  ..........  55' 

3^"x2^"x^"  ..........  60' 

3^"x2^"x%"  ..........  65' 

3^"x2^"xK"  .....  ......  70' 

3^"x2^"x^"  ..........  80' 

90' 
50' 
50' 
50' 
50' 


TEES 


5"tol" 


50' 


ZEES 

6"  and  5"  .................  70' 

4"x%"  ..................  65' 

4"  x%"  and  under.-  .......  70' 

3"..  .  70' 


DECK  BEAMS 
10" 

9",  8"  and  7" 

6".. 


45' 
65' 
60' 


BULB   ANGLES 

10",  9",  8"  and  7" 65' 

6" 60' 

5"..  .  65' 


When  these  lengths  are  not  sufficient  to  meet  the  requirements  of 
a  specific  job,  submit  the  matter  to  the  Purchasing  Department  for 
further  information. 


26 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL  ' 


1.     TABLE  OF  LIMITING  SIZES  OF  CHECKERED  PLATES 
ROLLED  BY  THE  CARNEGIE  MILLS. 


Thickness, 
Inches 

Weight  per 
Square  Foot 

Length  for 
Widths, 
6"  to  11%" 

Length  for 
Widths, 
12"  to  48" 

Length  for 
Widths, 
48M"  to  60" 

:& 

8.7 

10'  0" 

15'  0" 

1A 

11.2 

10'  0" 

20'  0" 

20'  0" 

& 

13.8 

10'  0" 

20'  0" 

20'  0" 

*/8 

16.3 

10'  0" 

20'  0" 

20'  0" 

& 

18.9 

10'  0" 

20'  0" 

20'  0" 

1A     •-.:. 

21.4 

10'  0" 

20'  0" 

20'  0" 

Checkered  plates  of  narrower  widths  and  greater 
length  than  shown  in  above  table  may  be  submitted 
for  special  consideration.  Definite  promises  of 
delivery  cannot  be  made  unless  the  tonnage  is  large. 

2.     MAXIMUM  LENGTHS  OF  SHAPES  ROLLED  BY  PENCOYD  MILLS 


20" 
20" 
20" 
20" 
20" 
20" 
20" 
20" 
18" 
18" 
18" 
18" 
15" 
15" 
15" 
15" 
15" 
15" 
15" 
15" 
15" 
15" 
15" 
12" 


BEAMS 

x  100  lb 52' 

x  95  Ib 55' 

x  90  lb 58' 

x851b 61' 

x80  lb 65' 

x75  lb 69' 

x70  lb 74' 

x  65  lb 80' 

x  70  lb 52' 

x  65  lb..., 55' 

x  60  lb 60' 

x  55  lb 66' 

xlOOlb 46' 

x  95  lb 48' 

x90  lb 51' 

x85  lb 54' 

x80  lb 58' 

x75  lb 62' 

x70  lb 66' 

x65  lb 71' 

x60  lb 77' 

x55  lb 84' 

x  50,  45  and  42  lb 92' 

x65  lb...  .  58' 


12"  x  60  lb  

62' 

12"x55  lb  

68' 

12"  x  50  lb  

73' 

12"x45  lb  

80' 

12"  x  40,  35  and  31.5  lb  

90' 

10"x40  lb....  

60' 

10"  x  35  lb  

70' 

10"  x  30  lb  

80' 

10"  x  25  lb  

85' 

9"x35  lb  

65' 

9"x30  lb  

70' 

9"  x  25  and  21  lb  

80' 

8"  x  25.5  lb  

70' 

8"x23  lb  

75' 

8"  x  20.5  lb  

85' 

8"xl8  lb  

'90' 

7"x20  lb  

85' 

7"  x  17.5  and  15  lb  

90' 

6"  x  17.25  and  14.75  lb.  .  .  . 

100' 

6"  x  12.25  lb  

85' 

5"  x  14.75,  12.25  and  9.75  lb 

100' 

4"  x  10.5,  9.5  and  8.5  lb.  .  . 

40' 

4"x7.5  lb  

50' 

3"  x  7.5,  6.5  and  5.5  lb.... 

50' 

THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 


27 


MAXIMUM  LENGTHS  OF  SHAPES  ROLLED  BY  PENCOYD  MILLS — 
Continued 


CHANNELS 

15"  x  55,  50  and  45  Ib 75' 

15"  x  40,  35  and  33  Ib 75' 

13"  x  48.5  Ib 70' 

13"  x  31.9  Ib , 80' 

12"  x  40,  35,  30,  25  and  20.5 

Ib 80' 

10"x35  Ib 70' 

10"x30  Ib 75' 

10"x25  Ib 80' 

10"  x  20  and  15  Ib 90' 

9"  x  25  and  20  Ib 80' 

9"  x  15  and  13.25  Ib 100' 

8"  x  21.25  and  18.75  Ib. . . .  80' 
8"  x  16.25,  13.75  and  11.25 

Ib 100' 

7"  x  19.75  and  17.25  Ib.. .  .  80' 
7"  x  14.75, 12.25 and9.751b.100' 
6"  x  15.5,  13,  10.5  and8  lb.,100' 

5"  x  11.5,  9  and  6.5  Ib 100' 

4"  x  7.25,  6.25  and  5.25  Ib..  50' 

3"  x  6,  5  and  4  Ib 50' 

2M" 50' 

2"..  .  50' 


ANGLES 
Equal  Legs 

8"x8"xl",ft"an(W...110' 
8"  x  8"  x  if",  y±"  and  ft ".120' 
8"  x  8"  x  %",  A"  and  ^".150' 

6"x6"xft" 120' 

6"x6"x^" 130' 

6"x6"xtt" 140' 

6"x6"x%" 150' 

6"x6"x^" 160' 

6"  x  6"  x  ^",  A"  and  ^".170' 
5"  x  5"  same  as  6"  x  6". 
4"x4"xM",  H"  and  ^".120' 

4"x4"x&" 130' 

4"x4"x^" 140' 

4"x4"x1y/ 150' 


x  4"  x  y8"  and  &"  .....  170' 
"  x  3^"  same  as  4"  x  4". 
x  3"  x  &"  to  %"  same  as 
'    4"  x  4"  x  &"  to  %" 


70' 
45' 
50' 
60' 
70' 
50' 
60' 


x  2y2"  x 


and 


All 


70' 
"  angles  and  under.  .  70' 


ANGLES 

Unequal  Legs 

8"  x  6"  same  as  8"  x  8" 
7"  x  3^"  same  as  6"  x  6" 

6"x4"x%" 130' 

6"x4"x%" 135' 

6"x4"x%" 150' 

6"x4"x%" 160' 

6"x4"x%to  % 170' 

6"  x  3^"  same  as  6"  x  4" 
5"  x  4"  same  as  6"  x  4" 
5"  x  33^"  same  as  6"  x  4" 
5"  x  3"  same  as  4"  x  4" 
4"  x  3^"  same  as  4"  x  4" 
4"  x  3"  same  as  4"  x  4" 
3^"  x  3"  same  as  4"  x  4" 
33^"  x  2y2"  x  ^"  and  up, 
same  as  4"  x  4"  xj^"  and  up. 

3H"x2^"x^" 70' 

3^"x2"x^g" 60' 

3^"x2"x^"andM//....  70' 

3"x2^"xi^" 45' 

3"x2^"x^" 50' 

3"x2^"x^" 55' 


28 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 


MAXIMUM  LENGTHS  OF  SHAPES  ROLLED  BY  PENCOYD  MILLS — 
Continued 


ANGLES — CONTINUED 
Unequal  Legs 


3"  x  23^"  x  jj^" 60' 

3"  x  2V/"  x  V"  70' 
3"  x  2"  same  as  3"  x  2^" 

2W'x2"x%"...  .  55' 


2M"  x 


and 


60' 

70' 
70' 
70' 


All  square  root  angles  same 

as  others. 
All   cover  angles  same  as 

others. 


TEES 


6"x4" 

5"  x  4"  and  3^" 


4"x3" 
4"x2" 


3"  x  3^"  and  2H" 

3"xlH" 

2M"  x  2"  and  1%" 


40' 
50' 
50' 
50' 
50' 
40' 
50' 
40' 
40' 
50' 
25' 
50' 
50' 


"" 


4"x4 


50' 
50' 
3^'/x3^"  ...............  40' 

3"x3"  ...................  45' 

2^"  x  2^"  and  under  .....  50' 

ZEES 

6"x34.541b  ...............  125' 

6"x31.891b  ...............  135' 

6"x29.371b  ...............  140' 

6"  x  28.05  Ib.  and  under  ....  150' 

DECK  BEAMS 

8"x28.61b  ................  60' 

8"  x  26.9  Ib.  and  25.2  Ib..  .  .  65' 

8"x23.51b  ................  70' 

8"x21.81b  ................  75' 

8"x211b  .................  80' 

7"x24.51b  ................  70' 

7"x231b  .................   75' 

7"x21.51b  ................  80' 

7"x201b  ..................  85' 

7"xl8.5lb  ................  90' 

7"xl81b  .................   95' 

6"x  19.6  Ib  ................   90' 

6"xl8.31b  ........  .  .......  95' 

6"  x  17.1,  15.8  and  14.5  Ib..  100' 
All  5"  deck  beams  .....  100' 


BULB   ANGLES 

All  bulb  angles 


150; 


When  these  lengths  are  not  sufficient  to  meet  the  requirements  of 
a  specific  job,  submit  the  matter  to  the  Pencoyd  Mills  for  further 
information. 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL  29 

MAXIMUM  LENGTHS  OF  SHAPES  ROLLED  BY  GARY  MILLS  AND 
SOUTH  CHICAGO  MILLS 

24"  to  18"  Beams 65' 

15"xl001b 45' 

15"x901b 50' 

15"  x  80  Ib 60' 

15"  x  60  Ib.  to  75  Ib ". 62' 

15"  x  35  Ib.  to  55  Ib 75' 

12"  Beams  and  under 75' 

All  Channels 75' 

All  Angles  6"x 4"  and  over 90' 

All  Angles  6"x3^"  to  4"  x  4",  inclusive 75' 

All  Angles  4"x3^"  and  under 60' 


30 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 


SIZES  AND  LENGTHS  OF  STANDARD  STOCK  CARRIED  BY 
A.  B.  Co.  CENTRAL  DIVISION  PLANTS 


AMBRIDGE 

Andes 

Aligln 

H 

& 

M 

& 

H 

A 

H 

A 

« 

H 

% 

tt 

H 

1 

8x6 

•30 

7  X3M 
6x6 

30 

30 
30 

30 

30 

30 

6x4 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

6   x3H 

30 

30 

30 

5   x3H 

30 

30 

30 

30 

5x3 

30 

30 

4x4 

30 

30 

30 

4   x3M 

30 

4x3 

30 

30 

3^x3^ 
3Hx  3 

30 
30 

30 
30 

30 

30 

3^x2M 

30 

30 

3x3 

30 

30 

30 

3    x2M 

30 

30 

2^x2^ 

30 

30 

* 

2Hx  2 

30 

30 

2x2 

30 

Plates 

36 

15 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

15 

15 

15 

30 

30 

24 

15 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

21 

30 

18 

30 

30 

30 

16 

30 

30 

30 

30 

15 

30 

30 

14 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

13 

30 

30 

12 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

11 

30 

10 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

9 

30 

30 

30 

30 

8 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

7 

30 

30 

30 

30 

6 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

5 

30 

30 

30 

30 

4 

30 

30 

33^ 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

3 

30 

30 

30 

30 

2K 

30 

30 

30 

30 

2M 

30 

30 

30 

2 

30 

1M 

30 

18 

30 

30 

Ambridge  Plant  carries  Q  Stock  ft,  L  B,  f .  l},Mi.U.  U*  I  Mi,  U,  1  i.  8  in  35'-0"  Lengths. 
"       "      O     "       2J,2i2f,2J,3t,3f,3f,3i,4i,4J,5i,5|,61inl5'-0"Lengths. 
"     Q     "        i,J,l,H,lJm35'-0"  Lengths. 
"  a  small  amount  of  A  and  i  Plates  for  Detail  Fillers. 


THE   ORDERING    OF   MATERIAL 


31 


SIZES  AND  LENGTHS  OF  STANDARD  STOCK  CARRIED  BY 
A.  B.  Co.  CENTRAL  DIVISION  PLANTS 


CANTON 

SHIFFLER 

I 

Angles 

I-Beams 

f 

| 

1 

* 

'4 

A 

H 

A 

H 

H 

H 

u 

A 

H 

A 

\i 

A 

H 

K 

1 

1 

1 

6x6 

60 

60 

60 

60 

40 

40 

40 

24"  x  100 

60 

6x4 

60 

60 

60 

40 

40 

40 

40 

24"  x  80 

60 

60 

40 

40 

40 

40 

20"  x  80 

60 

60  60 

60 

40 

40 

40 

20"  X  65 

60 

60 

40 

40 

18"  X  55 

60 

4x4 

60 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

15"  x  60 

60 

4x3 

60  60 

40 

40 

40 

15"  x  42 

60 

60 

3J^  x3V£ 

40 

40 

12"  x  40 

60 

3^x3 
3^x2^ 
3x3 

1  l*g 

60 
60 
50 
50 

60 

60 
60 
50 

60 
60 

40 
40 
40 

40 
40 
40 
40 

40 
40 

12"  x  31  H 
10"  x  25 
9"x  21 
8"x  18 

7"x  15 

60 
60 
60 
60 
60 

60 
60 
60 
60 
60 

40 
40 
40 
40 
40 

50 

50 

40 

40 

6"x  12% 

60 

60 

40 

Px  2 

50 

50 

40 

40 

5"  x   9M 

60 

60 

x  2 

50 

40 

4"  x   7H 

45 

50 

Plates 

Channels 

48 

34 

34 

34 

42 
36 

34 

34 
34 

34 
34 

30 

30 

30 

30 

15"  x  33 
12"  x  25 

60 
60 

60 

40 

30 
24 
20 
18 
16 
14 
12 
10 

34 
34 
34 
34 
40 
40 
40 

34 
34 
34 
34 
34 
40 
40 
40 

34 
34 
34 
34 
40 
40 
40 

40 

34 

34 
40 
40 

34 

34 
34 
40 

34 

34 
34 

30 
30 

30 
30 

30 
30 

30 
30 

12"  x  20  ^ 
10"  x  15 
9"x  15 
9"x  13  ^ 
8"x  11  M 
7"x  12  M 
7"x  9% 
6"x   8 

60 
60 

60 
60 

60 
60 

60 
60 

60 
60 

60 
60 

40 
40 
40 
40 
40 
40 

40 

8 
6 
5 

40 
34 
34 

40  40 
34  34 
34  34 

30 
30 

30 
30 

30 
30 

30 

30 

30 

5"x   6^ 
4"x   5M 

60 

45 

60 
50 

4 

34 

34! 

30 

30 

30 

3 

25 

25  25 

25 

25 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

25 

25  25 

30 

30 

30 

2M 

25 

25 

30 

30 

30 

2 

25 

25 

30 

. 

25 

25 

25 

IV 

25 

25 

25 

Canton  Plant  carries  Q  Stock  f,  f,  f,  1, 1|,1  J,  1J,  If,  If  in  25'-0"  Lengths. 

O     "      2J,2f,2f,2f,2i,3iin20'-0"Lengths. 

All  Plants  carry  a  small  amount  of  &  and  J  Plates  for  Detail  Fillers. 


32 


THE  ORDERING   OF    MATERIAL 


SIZES  AND  LENGTHS  OF  STANDARD  STOCK  CARRIED  BY 
A.  B.  Co.  EASTERN  DIVISION  PLANTS 


ELMIRA 

PENCOYD 

Angles 

ft 

1A 

* 

H 

ft 

H 

ft 

H 

H 

H 

1 

H 

ft 

K 

ft 

H 

A 

H 

Y* 

H 

'I' 

8x6 

30 

30 

7   x  3^2 

30 

30 

6x6 

60 

60 

60 

60 

30 

30 

30 

6x4 

60 

60 

60 

30  30  30 

6  x3J^ 

30 

30130  30 

5  x3y2 

55 

55 

60 

30 

30 

30 

30 

5x3 

30 

30 

4x4 

55 

55 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

55 

30 

30 

30 

30 

4x3 

55 

55 

55 

30 

30 

30 

55 

55 
55 

30 
30 

30 
30 

30 
30 

31^  jj  2J/£ 

55 

55 

55 

55 

3x3 

50 

55 

55 

30 

30 

30 

3x2^ 

50 

50 

50 

30 

30 

3x2 

50 

50 

50 

50 

30 

30 

2H  x     2 

50 

50 

2x2 

50 

50 

2x1% 

50 

Plates 
60 
48 

20 

20 
34 

20 
34 

20 
34 

34 

42 

34 

34 

36 

34 

34 

34 

34 

34 

34 

20 

12 

12 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

15 

30 

34 

34 

34 

30 

30 

30 

24 

20 

34 

3434 

34 

34 

34 

34 

20 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

15 

20 

34 

34 

34 

18 

34 

34 

34 

34 

30 

30 

16 

34 

34 

34 

34 

34 

34 

30 

30 

30 

30 

15 

30 

14 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

13 

30 

30 

12 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

20 

30 

30 

3030 

30 

3030 

10 

40 

40 

40 

40 

30 

30 

30  30 

30 

3030 

9 

30 

30 

30 

30 

8 

40 

40 

40 

40 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

30 

7 

30 

30 

6 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

21 

21 

21  21 

21 

21 

21 

5 

20 

20 

20 

21 

21 

4 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

21 

21 

21 

21 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

21 

21 

21 

21 

21 

21 

3 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

21 

21 

21 

21 

21 

21 

20 

20 

20 

20 

21 

21 

21 

21 

21 

2j| 

20 

21 

21 

23 

20 

20 

20 

1H 

20 

IJi 

20 

1 

20 

Elmira  Plant  carries  O  Stock  *  x  15'0"  f  ,  f  ,  J,  1,  H,  1  J.1J,  1  f  ,  2  x  30'0"  and  2  *,  2  1,  2  f  ,  2  J,3  f  ,3  1  , 
3f,4i,4Mi,5i  x  20'0"  Rails  60  Ib.  x  33'0"  and  40  Ib.x3(y0" 

Pencoyd  "         "          "         f ,  i,  1, 1  i,  1 J, x 30'0"  and  1 J,  1  f , H,  If, 2,  2 \  x  20'0" 

"  a  Stock  *  and  f  x  13'0"  and  f ,  i,  1, 1 J,  H,  1  f ,  H  x  30' 0" 
All  Plants  carry  a  small  amount  of  A  and  V%  Plates  for  Detail  Fillers. 


THE  ORDERING   OF    MATERIAL 


33 


SIZES  AND  LENGTHS  OF  STANDARD  STOCK  CARRIED  BY 
A.  B.  Co.  EASTERN  DIVISION  PLANTS 


TRENTON 

[EDGEMOOR 

Angles 

I-Beams 

fl 

2 

V 

X 

& 

* 

A 

H 

M 

H 

1 

M 

v 

H 

ft 

H 

& 

H 

i 

1 

8x8 

55 

55 

4"xll5 

65 

8x6 

55 

55 

55 

4"  x  100 

65 

7  x3M 

55 

55  55 

4"x    90 

65 

6x6 

55 

55  55155  55 

35 

35 

35 

35 

51 

4"x    80 

65 

6x4 

55 

55  55|55  55 

35 

35 

35 

35 

5 

6  x3M 

55 

5555 

35 

35 

20"  x    65       60 

5x3^ 
5x3 

55 
55 

55 
55 

55 

55 
55 

35 

35 
35 

35 

35 

5"X    42       60 

60 

4x4 

55 

55 

55 

55 

35 

35 

35 

4  x3K 

55 

55 

55 

35 

35 

12"  x    31H 

60 

60 

4x3 

55 

55 

55 

35 

35 

10"  x    25 

60 

60 

3J^  x  3y% 

i55 

55 

55 

35 

35 

9"x    21 

60 

60 

3!^  x  3 

55 

55  55 

55 

55 

35 

35 

31^  x  2J^ 

55 

5555 

55 

35 

35 

8"x    18 

60 

60 

3x3 

50 

55 

55 

55 

35 

35 

35 

7"x    15 

60 

60 

3  x  2M 

50 

50 

50 

50 

35 

6"x    12M 

60 

55 

3x2 

50 

50 

5"  x      9M 

60 

55 

50 

50 

50 

35 

35 

4"  x       lYz 

50 

40 

2>|x  22 

50 

50 

3"x      5^ 

50 

2x2 

50 

50 

35 

Plates 

Channels 

60 

40 

40 

40 

15"  x    33 

60 

60 

48 

40 

40 

40 

40 

35 

12"  x    20^ 

60 

60 

42 

40 

40 

40 

40 

10"  x    15 

60 

60 

40 

40 

40 

9"x    13M 

60 

60 

36 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

35 

35 

35 

35 

8"x    11  Y± 

60 

60 

30 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

7"  x      9H 

60 

55 

24 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

6"x      8 

60 

55 

22 

40 

40 

40 

40 

5"x      6K 

60 

55 

20 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

35 

4"x      5M 

40 

40 

18 

40 

40J40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

16 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

35 

35 

15 

40 

40 

40 

40 

14 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

40 

35 

35 

35 

35 

13 

40 

Tees 

12 
10 

40 
40 

40 
40 

4040 
4040 

40 
40 

4040 
4040 

35 
35 

35 
35 

35 
35 

35 
35 

35 

35 

3'^x  3  x  A 

35 

9 
8 

40 

40 

4040 
4040 

40 
40 

35 
35 

35 
35 

35 
35 

30 

7 

40 

40 

40 

35 

H-Sections 

6 

35 

35 

3535 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

5 

35 

35 

3535 

35 

35^35  35 

8"  x   34 

60 

4 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35       35 

35 

35 

6"x  23.8 

60 

3/^ 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35  3535  35 

35 

35 

35 

5"  x  18.7 

60 

3 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35  35  35 

35 

35 

35 

2H 
2M 

35 
35 

35 
35 

35 
35 

35 

35 

35 
35 

35 

35 

Monorail      ] 
Sections       / 

40 

2 

35 

35 

35 

35 

Trenton  Plant  carries  O  Stock  f,  f,  |,  1,  U,  1J,  H,  U,  2,  2J,  2*  x  35'0"  and  |  x25'0" 

Edgemoor  "         "          "        7|  down  to  1  and  |  and  I  D  Stock 

All  Plants  carry  a  small  amount  of  A  and  H  Plates  for  Detail  Fillers,   (also  A  at  Trenton). 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 


1-1      1                                  CM 

OO                O                                    TO      lOW      OT 
COOT                **                                    OT      COCO      OT 

^      1                     CMCM      CM                °« 

O                     O                          O      COCOCOCO      OT 

X    1             °j°i    CM          S 

*^                   cooococococo     w 

§ 

X                         CMCM      CM               8 

OO      OOO               OTOOOTOO      O 
COOT       <*       "*       •*                 COCOCOCOCOCO       OT 

3 

\f                         OOOOO           O 
mX                          CM  CM  CM  CO  CO           CO 

°,°,      S      5      SSS0.      OTOTCOWOTCOOT 

g 

,J»                    OOOOOO           O 
5                     CMCMCMCMCOOT           CO 

OO      O      O      OOOOOOCOO      OOO 
r^Tj<       <^       T*<       ^  rJH  «*  ^l  CO  CM  OT  CO       CMCQCM 

s 

N*                OOOOOOO           O 
*                CM  CM  CM  CM  CM  CO  CO           <* 

OO      O      O      OOOOOOOOOOOO 
•*•*       T*H       ^       TH-^^^COCMOTOTCQCMCMCM 

HS                     CMCMCMCM      8           S 

O       O      O      O           OOOOOCDCO      O 
^      ^      ^      ^           OTCMOTOTOTrHrH      CM 

| 

8 

X                                                          e« 

§00       o           o                 o 
COCO           CO                OT                          CM 

00 

\o>                                                                           O 
"S\                                                             00 

OTOTOT           OT                                              CM 

1 

X      |                                      CM           8 

COCOCOCOCO       OT       OTOTOTOTOTOT            CM 

1-3 

X     |                                 CMOT           8 

OOOOO      O      OOOOOO           OO      O 
COCOCOCOCO       OT       OTOTOTWOTCM            CMCM       CM 

GO 

HS    |                      g0,       g 

OOOOO      O      OOOOOO      OOO      O 
COCOOTCOCO       OT       COCOCOCOCOCM       CMCMCM       CM 

N^I      1                                  OO           O 

12    '                        coco        co 

COCOCOCOCO      OT      OTOTOTOTOTCM      CMCMCM      CM 

tO 
00 

LOLO  tO      lO      tO 
OTOTOT      OT      OT 

^ 

OT      CO      CO 

^                                       n 

J5J2J2    t2    12                                      IS 

TOOTOT      CT      OT                                                                  OT 

H 

X 

lO           tO      LO                LO 
OT   .       OT      OT                OT 

§ 

\s»      I                                                    to 
*J      1                                                           CO 

OT  COCOOTCOOT  OT  CO  OT  COCOCOCO                 OT 

£ 

HS 

lOtOtOtOtO      lO      to 

COCOCOOTOT       OT       OT 

Q 

x  1                        £S 

5  LO  LO  LO  LO  LO  tO  lO  LO  LO  lO  tO  lO  tO  lO                 lOtO       lOtOlO 
D  CO  CO  CO  CO  COCO  OTOTOT  COCOCOCOCO                 COOT       OTOTOT 

•*                                   g 

LOLOiOLOtOlOiOLOLOLOiOlOlO 
COCOCOCOCOCOCOOTOTCOCOCOCO 

^!                                    ,H                              00 

lO  LO  lO  lO  LO  LO  lO  LO  LO  LO  LO  LO  lO                                 LOLOlO 
OT  OOCOCO  OT  OT  OT  COCOCOCOCOCO                                 OTOTOT 

-IS 

i 

v                   S    *°          ^ 

co\                                 CO       CO                 CO 

COOT      OT      OT                         OT 

* 

OT 

No0                         lOtO      tO               lO 
o\                            COCO       CO                 00 

lOLO                        LO         LO         LO                               O 

COCO                OT      OT      OT                     OT 

£J 

•K                                    co 

to 

OT 

i-\                          COCO      COCO           CO 

lOiOiOiOtO      tO      lO      tOiOOO      OOiO 
OTOTOTOTOT      OT      OT      OTOTOTOT      OTOTCM 

*t»                          !2          J2 
n^i                              co            co 

IO                lO         LO         LO                        O         O 

OT           OT      OT      OT               OT      OT 

e^\                            COCO       COCOCOCOCO 

lOlOlOtOlO      tO      lOLOiOLOOOOOOtOlO 
OTOTOTOTOT      OT      OTOTOTOTOTOTOTOTOTCMCSI 

HS                         COW      COOT           CO 

tOlOtO      lO      lO      tOiOiOiOOOOOOiOlOtO 
COOTOT      OT      TO      CO  CO  TO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CM  CM  CM 

^                             OT           CO           CO 

TOOT                          CO  CO  CO  CO  TO  CO  CO  COOT  CM  CM  CM 

^                             8 

N«                                                                                         0 

t*\                                                                 CO 

8 

x                   88 

COCO       CO       CO                            CO            COCO 

v»                         22 

ic\                                            CO                 CO 

COCO       CO       CO                            CO            CO 

H 

\N           O           OO      OO           O 
r-K           CO           COCO      COCO           CO 

COCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCO       COCOCOCO 

i 

TH                                            CO                 CO 

COCO       CO       CO                 CO       CO            CO 

x     8     88  88     8 

cococococococococococococococococococo 

Hs                   88 

OOO                          O                     O 

CO            CO       CO                            CO                       CO 

CO                CO                          CO 

HS                     8 

1                    «StD§SSM8cMCMCMC 

^OCOOtfi^OTCM^OOJCOt-CDtO^COOTCMCMCMSS 

Gary         Plant  carries  O  Stock  5  f ,  5  J,  5 1,  4 1,  4  f ,  4  f,  4 1,  3 1  and  2  }  \  15'0" 


American 


If  and  If  x30'-0";l},  If.lf.li,  1.  i, -795,  .680, 
D  Stock  2  i,  2  and  1|  x  2(XO";  If,  1,  1  and  f  x  35'0" 
14       "        O  Stock  2 1, 2, 1  f ,  H,  1  i,  1,  1,  f  x  35'0"  and  }  x  20'0" 


and  f  x  35'Q" 


D  Stock  1,  §  x  35'0"  and  }  x  20'0" 


THE  ORDERING  OF  MATERIAL 


35 


SIZES  AND  LENGTHS  OF  STANDARD  STOCK  CARRIED  BY  A.  B.  Co.  WESTERN  DIVISION  PLANTS 

MINNEAPOLIS 

XI 

I-Beams 

I 

1 

I 

S 

1 

XI            gg 

X 

HSI 

OO 
10  10 

oooooooo    o 
10  10  LO  m  in  10  10  10     to 

*Z\              10  10  10  m  10  10  10  10     to  10  10  •*•*•<*     coco 

24"  x  100 
24"  x    80 
24"  x    71 
21"  x    75 
21"  x    58 
20"  x    80 
20"  x    65 
18"  x    60 
18"  x    55 
L8"x    46 
L5"x    60 
L5"x    50 
15"  x    45 
15"  x    42 
L5"x    35 
L2"x    40 
12"  x    3iy2 
12"  x    25 
10"  x    25 
9"x    21 
8"x    201A 
8"x    18 
7"x    15 
6"x    12M 
5"x    12M 
5"x      9% 
4"x      7H 
3"x      5H 

Channels 

15"  x    33 
12"  x    35 
12"  x    25 
12"  x    20  H 
10"  x    25 
10"  x    20 
10"  x    15 
9"x    15 
9"x    13  M 
8"x    21  g 
8"x    13  M 
8"x    11  M 
7"x    17^ 
7"x    12X 
7'  x      9M 
6'  x    IQYz 
6'  x      8 
5'  x    11  M 
5'  x      6y2 
4'  x      7M 
4'  x      6M 
4'  x      5M 
3'  x      6 
3"x      4 

H-BEAMS 

8"x    34 
6"x    23.8 
5"x    18.7 
4"x    13.6 

60 
60 
60 
60 
60 
60 
60 

60 
60 

60 
60 

60 
60 
60 
60 

60 
60 
60 

60 
60 

60 
60 

60 

60 
60 

60 

60 
60 
60 

60 
60 
60 
60 

60 
60 

60 
60 
60 
60 
45 
60 
45 
45 
45 

60 

60 
60 
50 

30 
60 

60 

60 
60 
45 
45 
45 
45 
45 
45 
45 
45 

60 

60 
60 

60 

60 
60 

60 
60 
60 
60 
60 
60 

60 
50 
40 

60 

60 
60 
60 
60 
60 
60 
60 

60 

60 
60 
50 

50 

60 
60 
60 
60 

50 
50 

60 
60 

60 
60 

60 

60 
60 

50 
60 

60 
60 
60 

50 
50 

60 
60 

60 
60 

60 

60 
60 
60 

50 

60 
50 

50 

50 
50 

50 
50 

50 

i°o 

60 

50 
45 

50 
50 
50 

50 
50 
50 
50 

50 
50 

50 
20 
50 
40 

HS                                              lOiOlO      iOiOlO-*THTH      COCOCO 

^t                                         10     10  in  m  •*  •*  T*  co  co  co  oo     co 

i«                                                                        mmtoioio. 

r*                                                                                                 OOOOOOOOOO 

x 

U5O 

coco 

00 
£) 

§3 

X          8g 

w      8g 

XI  8  g  §            § 

HS|         gg8g      §    g 

•x|        gggggggg  ggggS 

,-ko  |                                         OOO      OOOOOO      OO 

5;  1                             101010    loioioiocoio    1010 

»l                '            ggggggg 

*|                                                        ggg 

DETROIT 

1-1 

gt 

&|  8     888 

\oo  1     O          OO      O               O 

JK  1    CD       coco    co           S 

\P»        O      OOOOO      OOO      OO          iQ 
nk         co       COCOCOCOCO       COCOCO       COCO            CO 

•^                cococo        cococo                  oo 

\oo  1              OOOOO      OOO      OOiOmmm      lOiO 

XI           cococococo    cococo    cocococococo    cow 

«£  1                            O          OOO      OOiOiOiOiO      lOiO 
r*  |                              CO           COCOCO      COCOOOOOCOOO      COCO 

Se 

8  88SSSS  £££ 

HS 

lO 

00 

AMERICAN 

x|  §     § 

* 

X 

88     8 

* 

x|  S  88888  8  S  SSS 

HS- 

OOO          O      »O      lO      »O      lO 
COCOCO           CO      •*      T*i      *      •<* 

X 

OOOOO      OiOiO      lOiQiOiOiOiO      lO 
COCOCOCOCO      CD'*'*      «44-44«*Ti4<44T*4      •* 

HS 

8SS  SJSS^SS  333 

X|                                 SSSSSSS3 

i 

i 

^ 

IOIO           lOiO 

T***                 <*•* 

X 

IOIO      lOiOlO 

•*T*           •*•*•* 

v«-  |iO  lO  10  tO  1C  lO  U3          lO      lO          lO 

;K  !•*•*•*•*•*•*  T*      •*    ^      ^« 

*i* 

333            3 

X 

3333     3  33333  3 

HS 

333  3 

X 

i 

w^Si^^cl^^cl^^wWclwclw^cl^^S^ 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXMX 

00  00  00  C-  CO  CO  CO  10  tO  10  10  •*  •*  •*  ^^^00  00  CO  ^^CN  ^!^rH 
COCOCO                  CfltN       r-li-H 

Detroit         Plant  carries  Q 
Minneapolis     " 


O  Stock2i,2J,2,  If,  If,  If,  If,  11,  1|  and  Ix25'0" 

O     "    A  andix!6'0";  |x20'0";2^,2i,  2J,2, 11, 1J,  If,  1J,  11,  |, 

and  }  x  30'0"  and  33'0";  6,  4  J,  4  J,  4,  3  and  2f  x  16'0" 
D  Stock  2  §,  2, 1  i,  1  §,  1  f ,  1 J,  1 1,  1,  I,  f  and  £  x  30' 0"  and  33'0" 
mount  of  A  and  t  Plates  for  Detail  Fillers. 


,  ! 


All  Plants  carry  a  small  amount  of  A  and  J  Plates  for  Detail  Fillers. 


36  PREPARATION    OF  ADVANCE    BILLS 


CHAPTER  II 

PREPARATION  OF  ADVANCE  BILLS 

Advance  bills  are  to  be  written  in  pencil  on  Form  D51 
with  one  or  two  carbon  copies  to  suit  plant  require- 
ments. Send  original  or  original  and  one  carbon 
copy  of  bill  to  Order  Office  of  fabricating  plant. 
Order  Office  will  return  copy  of  bill  to  Drawing 
Room,  showing  length  of  material  ordered,  item 
numbers,  etc.  See  page  41. 


When  Advance  Bills  Are  Not  to  be  Written 

2.  Advance  bills  are  not  to  be  written  when  drawings 
are  furnished  by  others  and  no  material  ordered  in 
advance,  or  when  drawings  have  to  be  approved 
before  material  is  ordered.  In  such  cases  the 
original  copies  of  shop  bills  are  to  be  sent  to  the 
Order  Office,  which  will  order,  itemize  and  return 
bills  to  the  Drawing  Room.  When  drawings  are 
made  away  from  the  fabricating  plant,  the  Order 
Office  will  in  addition  to  ordering  the  material  take 
care  of  the  printing  of  shop  bills. 

AUTallowances  for  trimming  and  finishing  should  be 
clearly  shown  on  the  shop  bills  used  as  advance 
bills,  same  notations  are  required  as  for  advance 
bills  on  pages  6.7  to  12.3  and  15.4  to  15.9. 


PREPARATION   OF  ADVANCE   BILLS  37 

Lengths  on  Advance  Bills. 

1.  As  far  as  practicable  in  the  time  allowed  for  ordering 
material,  the  lengths  required  with  allowances  as 
per  pages  6.7  to  12.3  and  15.4  to  15.9  should  appear 
on  the  advance  bills.  This  rule,  however,  is  to  be 
disregarded  on  rush  orders  where  it  is  necessary  to 
cover  sufficient  stock  or  to  get  orders  in  before 
details  have  progressed  sufficiently  to  obtain  exact 
lengths.  The  material  involved  in  such  cases 
usually  consists  of  plates  and  angles.  Beams, 
channels,  tees  and  zees  should  be  ordered  to  required 
lengths.  For  small  detail  material,  the  required 
lineal  feet  may  'be  called  for  on  advance  bills. 
This,  however,  applies  only  to  detail  material  six 
feet  long  and  less.  In  "  Remarks"  column  of 
advance  bills,  after  lineal  feet,  give  approximate 
length  of  cut  piece.  The  required  number  of  lineal 
feet  of  lattice  bars  is  to  be  billed.  A  liberal  excess 
is  to  be  allowed. 


A=Stock 

2.  All  material,  as  far  as  practicable,  should  be  covered 
on  advance  bills.  Material  for  minor  details 
developed  in  the  work  and  known  to  be  in  stock  at 
the  fabricating  plant  can  be  cared  for  by  the  Order 
Office  in  itemizing.  When  drawings  are  made 
away  from  the  fabricating  plant,  material  that  has 
not  been  covered  on  advance  bills  is  to  be  marked 
"A-Stock"  on  shop  bills  and  is  to  be  taken  care  of 
by  the  fabricating  plant.  The  purpose  of  the 
A-Stock  notation  is  to  have  the  fabricating  plant 
take  care  of  small  detail  material  that  has  not  been 
covered  on  advance  bills  and  any  material  to  be 
ordered  at  the  time  shop  bills  are  ready  for  the  shop. 
Additions  are  sometimes  required  by  changes  in 
design.  In  such  cases  the  A-Stock  notation  allows 
the  shop  bills  to  be  sent  to  the  plant  without  waiting 
for  advance  bills  to  be  written  and  to  take  their 
regular  course.  The  fabricating  plant  immediately 
upon  receipt  of  shop  bills  will  go  over  them  and  list 
all  A-Stock  and  provide  for  same. 


38  PREPARATION    OF   ADVANCE   BILLS 

A=Stock — Continued 

1.  The  fact  that  material  not  ordered  can  be  marked  as 

"  A-Stock"  on  shop  bills  must  not  be  construed  by 
Drawing  Rooms  to  mean  that  the  ordering  of  any 
material  by  advance  bills  can  be  delayed  or  omitted. 
All  material  should  be  covered  on  advance  bills  as 
early  as  possible,  except  for  the  special  cases 
mentioned. 

2.  In  assuming  that  A-Stock  can  be  taken  from  stock  at 

the  plant,  always  consult  the  stock  list  or  list  of 
standard  stock  carried  by  fabricating  plant.  See 
pages  30  to  35. 

3.  When  drawings  are  made  by  the  Drawing  Room  of 

the  fabricating  plant,  A-Stock  may  be  used  as 
outlined  herein,  if  authorized  by  Order  Office. 


Eyebars,  Separators  and  Clevises 

4.  Advance  bills  should  not  be  written  for  eyebars  or 

castings  except  cast  iron  separators.  Drawings  of 
eyebars  and  castings  should  be  sent  to  the  fabricat- 
ing plant  with  advance  bills  for  other  material  where 
the  ordering  of  the  material  will  be  taken  care  of. 

5.  Cast  iron  separators  are  to  be  ordered  on  advance 

bills  or  by  an  accompanying  sketch  if  the  plant 
requires  it,  or  if  they  are  special.  State  clearly 
when  ordering  separators  or  other  similar  materials 
whether  they  are  to  be  shipped  loose  or  are  to  be 
assembled  in  the  shop. 

6.  In  billing  clevises  on  advance  bills,  be  sure  the  follow- 

ing information  is  given:     (No  sketch  necessary.) 

1.  Diameter  of  head D 

2.  Size  of  upset,  diameter U 

3.  Hand  of  thread Right  or  Left 

4.  Size  of  pin,  diameter P 

5.  Grip  of  jaw H 


PREPARATION    OF  ADVANCE   BILLS  39 

U.  M.  Plates 

1.  Items  of  plates  that  must  be  Universal  should  be  so 

marked  on  advance  bills.  If  not  marked  they  are 
to  be  either  Universal  or  Sheared,  as  per  the  note 
on  printed  form  of  advance  bill.  U.  M.  plates  can 
be  obtained  from  Carnegie  Steel  Co.  up  to  48"  wide, 
from  Indiana  Steel  Co.  up  to  60"  wide.  Before 
specifying  U.  M.  plates  over  30"  wide  for  Western 
Division  Plant,  consult  Engineer  of  fabricating 
plant. 

2.  U.   M.   plates  should   always  be  specified  where   a 

sheared  edge  would  make  a  bad  appearance  in  the 
finished  work  or  where  specifications  require  the 
planing  of  sheared  edges. 


Material  Shipped  Direct 

3.  Material  to  be  shipped  direct  to  the  site  should  be  so 
noted  on  advance  bill.  It  should  also  be  noted 
whether  it  is  to  be  painted  or  not  and  by  whom. 
(See  also  Instructions  for  Shipping  Bills,  page  74.8). 


Material  Specification 

4.  On  the  first  page  of  advance  bills  fill  in  the  specifica- 
tion card  number,  process  of  manufacture  and 
inspection.  This  is  not  be  filled  in  on  the  other 
pages  except  for  specifications  that  require  different 
grades  of  material.  In  such  cases  see  that  special 
card  number  is  given  to  this  material,  as  all  material 
will  be  supposed  to  be  in  accordance  with  card 
number  given  on  first  sheet,  unless  otherwise  noted. 


Labeling  Material  on  Advance  Bills 

5.  All  advance  bills  should  have  material  properly 
labeled,  showing  to-whjat  portion  of  the  structure 
the  material  belongs.  On  Mill  Buildings  the  usual 
headings  would  be  "Roof  Trusses,"  " Girts  and 
Bracing,"  "Columns;"  on  Office  Buildings  "(O-2) 
Columns,"  etc.,  "Second  Floor  Girders,"  "Column 
Bases  (0-2);"  on  Truss  Bridges  "Top  Chord  U2-4," 
"Diagonal  U2L4,"  "Transverse  Bracing." 


4O  PREPARATION   OF  ADVANCE   BILLS 

Labeling  Material  on  Advance  Bills — Continued 

1.  Plain  (unpunched)  material  should  be  so  marked. 

2.  When  work  is  divided  into  sections  or  divisions,  the 

material   for   each   section   or   division   should   be 
properly  noted  and  divided  on  advance  bills. 

3.  Advance  bills  should  also  be  made  in  such  a  way  that 

the  material  can  be  readily  identified  in  itemizing 
the  shop  bills. 

4.  Bills  for  different  plants  should  be  numbered  with 

separate  series  of  numbers.    See  page  80.2. 


Miscellaneous    Materials 

5.  The  preparing  of  bills  and  sketches  for  miscellaneous 
material  noted  on  page  6.6  should  be  done  at  the 
same  time  the  advance  bills  are  written. 


"Ordered"  Column  for  Order  Office 

6.  In  writing  advance  bills,  remarks  or  notations  of  any 
kind  should  never  extend  into  the  columns  headed 
"Ordered."  These  columns  are  exclusively  for  the 
notations  of  the  Order  Office. 


Marking  of  Advance  Bills  Complete 

7.  On  the  last  page  it  must  be  clearly  noted  in  line 
provided  for  that  purpose  whether  the  advance 
bill  completes  the  order  or  any  portion  of  the  order. 
This  line  on  the  advance  bill  should  always  be 
filled  in  in  such  a  manner  as  to  give  the  Order 
Office  a  clear  idea  of  what  remains  on  the  order  or 
any  portion  of  the  order.  If  complete,  except  for 
minor  details,  be  sure  to  note  same. 


PREPARATION   OF  ADVANCE   BILLS 

TYPICAL  ADVANCE  BILL 


41 


ADVANCE  BILL 

AMERICAN    BRIDGE    COMPANY 


3d 


LM 


1*73 


25 


/5 


jj> 


4t 


1/0 


10  (i«;|i 


30 


/2 


k&u^Li 


1 


ri 


tfi 


Ul 


10 


in 


5Eid 


4 


ae 


u 


-V 


2? 


M 


ti 


30 


tokUlk 


ss 


i,  'Vl* 


I/O 


* 


.OH^ABOH. 


:tJ. 


NAME  OF  STRUCTURE 


RDE 

6  ^ 


ORDER  No.   |      PAGE  NO. 

I 


42 


PREPARATION    OF   ADVANCE  BILLS 


Change  Orders 

1.  Change  orders  are  to  be  written  in  pencil  on  Form  D4 
with  two  carbon  c.opies.  The  original  and  one 
carbon  copy  should  be  sent  to  Order  Office  of 
fabricating  plant.  Order  Office  will  return  copy  to 
Drawing  Room,  showing  whether  changes  have 
been  made. 

TYPICAL  CHANGE  ORDER 


AMERICAN    BRIDGE   COMPANY 


CHANGE     FROM 


CHANGE    TO 


l& 


10 


13 


KT 


/J 


4-1 


0TltH 


n 


30_ 


10 


10 


46 


uW 


.14 


6p_ 


1  6 


/e~, 


~L^ 


no 


«« 


99 


60 


TOO  LATE   TO   CHAIMQE     REORDER  LINbS   fljU 


REPORT  UNE3   'J 


F^^PSICATIQ!!     _•. 


ORDER  NO         PAGE  NO 


NAME    OF    STRUCTUWP 


PREPARATION   OF  ADVANCE  BILLS  43 

Manner  of  Writing  Change  Orders 

1.  Special  care  should  be  used  in  writing  change  orders 

and  in  noting  on  the  advance  bill  the  items  that  are 
changed,  repeating  the  note  on  each  line  of  the  bill 
affected  by  the  change. 

2.  Leave  space  between  the  entries  on  the  change  order 

for  the  notations  of  the  Order  Office.  In  making 
complicated  changes,  several  lines  are  sometimes 
necessary  to  clearly  show  how  the  change  has  been 
made. 

3.  A  change  order  should  be  a  complete  record  of  each 

step  in  the  process  of  changing  material  ordered 
from  the  mill. 


Material  Ordered  in  Excess 

4.  For  material  ordered  in  excess  on  an  order,  or  left 

over  due  to  change  in  design,  send  a  change  order 
as  soon  as  same  is  discovered  to  Order  Office 
authorizing  them  to  cancel.  If  too  late  to  cancel, 
Order  Office  will  list  on  Put-into-Stock  Form  D 13 
and  notify  Drawing  Room.  The  purpose  of  this 
is  to  get  any  excess  material  into  stock  as  soon  as 
possible.  The  preceding  refers  more  particularly 
to  main  sections  and  not  to  small  detail  material. 

5.  For  this  latter  material,  after  shop  bills  are  itemized, 

Put-into-Stock  form  should  be  made  by  Order 
Office.  When  drawings  and  shop  bills  are  made 
away  from  the  fabricating  plant,  a  change  order 
form  must  be  sent  to  the  Order  Office  of  the  fabricat- 
ing plant;  the  change  order  need  give  only  such 
information  as  is  necessary  for  the  Order  Office  to 
prepare  a  Put-into-Stock  sheet. 


44        PREPARATION   OF    MILL   ORDERS   AND   REQUISITIONS 

CHAPTER  III 

PREPARATION  OF  MILL  ORDERS 
AND  REQUISITIONS 

1.  It  will  be  the  duty  of  the  Order  Office  to  compile 

orders  from  advance  bills,  drawings  or  shop  bills. 
They  will  multiple  material  in  accordance  with 
requirements  of  shop  equipment  and  make  allow- 
ances for  milling,  trimming,  etc.,  in  accordance  with 
notes  on  preliminary  bills  and  instructions  contained 
in  this  book. 

2.  When  drawings  are  made  away  from  fabricating  plant, 

the  Order  Office  at  fabricating  plant  will  write  all 
the  mill  orders  and  issue  all  requisitions  for  material, 
except  for  material  listed  on  Form  O&E13,  which 
is  assigned  to  Contracting  Department.  This 
material  should  be  drawn  or  listed  on  suitable 
drawing  room  forms  and  sent  with  letter  of  trans- 
mission to  the  Contracting  Department  of  Division 
in  which  sale  is  made.  Material  listed  on  Form 
O&E  13,  which  is  assigned  to  Purchasing  Depart- 
ment, should  be  listed  by  Drawing  Room  and  sent 
to  Order  Office  of  fabricating  plant  where  requisi- 
tions will  be  issued. 

3.  Mill   orders   will   be   compiled   according  to   general 

letters  issued  by  Purchasing  Department. 

Labeling  Mill  Orders 

4.  When  a  contract  is  divided  into  sections  or  divisions, 

the  material  for  each  section  or  division  must  be 
billed  separately  on  the  mill  order  and  the  section 
or  division  noted.  On  office  building  work,  each 
tier  of  columns  must  be  billed  separately.  This 
applies  also  to  floors  of  girders  and  beams,  except 
that  all  floors  connecting  to  any  tier  of  columns  may 
be  combined.  Mill  orders  must  be  properly 
labeled,  showing  the  tiers  and  floors  covered. 

Complete 

5.  Final  mill  orders  on  a  contract  should  be  marked 

" Complete"  when  advance  bills  state  that  order  is 
complete  except  for  small  details.  Additional 
material  can  always  be  ordered  on  a  contract,  even 
though  the  mill  order  is  marked  complete. 


PREPARATION    OF    MILL   ORDERS  AND   REQUISITIONS        46 

Mill  Order  Information  Sheets 

1.  In  filling  out  the  mill  order  information  sheet,  Form 

P122,  under  the  heading  " Specifications"  refer  to 
" Specification  Abstract  Card  Number"  and  do  not 
copy  specifications  in  detail .  Thus :  under  the  head- 
ing " Specifications"  write  "Refer  to  Card  No.  701" 
or  whatever  the  card  number  may  be.  In  this 
connection  care  must  be  taken  that  the  correct 
grade  is  inserted  after  the  card  number.  Thus, 
the  information  sheet  may  call  for  card  No.  709, 
when  the  actual  printed  Form  D509  may  call  for 
Card  No.  709  soft,  709  medium,  etc.,  the  grade 
indicating  some  particular  class  of  material  required 
by  the  specification  on  some  particular  portion  of 
the  structure.  In  addition  to  the  card  number, 
the  process  of  manufacture  and  the  inspection 
should  be  given.  When  there  is  no  outside  inspec- 
tion, state,  "Mill  Inspection,  No  Test  Reports 
Required"  or  "Mill  Inspection,  Send  Test  Reports 
to  Plant."  Though  the  card  number  for  material 
is  supposed  to  be  given  on  the  first  page  of  advance 
bill,  the  Order  Office  should  always  check  this  by 
referring  to  the  regular  information  sheet  and  to 
Form  D509. 

2.  Note  on  P122  if  work  is  for  export. 

Plant  Requisitions  and   Reassignment  Requisitions 

3.  The  Order  Office  at  fabricating  plant  will  issue  all 

plant  requisitions  on  Form  A4  and  reassignment 
requisitions  on  Form  A8.  In  making  out  requisi- 
tions be  sure  that  all  headings,  such  as  consignment, 
paint,  inspection,  etc.,  are  properly  filled  in.  When 
ordering  clevises,  be  sure  that  necessary  information 
is  given  by  the  usual  system  of  letters.  Page  38.6. 

4.  In  general,  all  material  should  be  listed  in  detail  on 

the  face  of  the  requisition,  using  two  or  more  sheets 
when  necessary.  The  exception  is  when  A8 
requisitions  cover  a  large  amount  of  rolling  mill 
material  with  too  many  items  to  be  listed  on  the 
requisition.  In  this  case  material  should  be  written 
on  the  regular  mill  order  form  and  requisition 
should  state  that  material  is  to  be  furnished  in 
accordance  with  accompanying  sheets,  enumerating 
the  sheets.  The  requisition  should  show  the 
weight  of  the  material  requisitioned  and  the  time 
of  delivery  required. 


46        PREPARATION   OF    MILL   ORDERS  AND    REQUISITIONS 

Plant  Requisitions  and  Reassignment  Requisitions 
—Continued 

1 .  When  A8  requisitions  cover  the  fabrication  of  material, 

the  required  number  of  drawings,  bills,  etc.,  should 
be  sent  to  the  fabricating  plant  and  requisition 
read  "To  be  fabricated  in  accordance  with  ac- 
companying drawings,  bills,  etc.,"  enumerating 
same  on  requisition. 

2.  The   distribution   and    numbering    of    A4    and    A8 

requisitions  should  be  in  accordance  with  general 
letters  issued  from  time  to  time  by  the  Auditing 
Department. 


Material   Furnished   by  the   Purchasing    and    Con= 
tracting  Departments 

3.  Material  listed  on  Form  0&E13,  to  be  furnished  by 

Purchasing  Department,  should  be  listed  by  Order 
Office  on  regular  Purchasing  Department  Requisi- 
tions, except  corrugated  sheets,  which  are  to  be 
ordered  on  Forms  P166  and  P167,  following 
instructions  in  Purchasing  Department's  general 
letters.  (Corrugated  steel  for  export,  see  page  125.8.) 
Painting  at  mill,  see  pages  145.5  and  145.6. 

4.  Material  listed  on  Form  0&E13,  to  be  furnished  by 

Contracting  Department,  is  not  ordered  by  Order 
Office;  lists  and  drawings  for  this  material  should  be 
sent  direct  to  Contracting  Department  by  Drawing 
Room  as  outlined  on  page  44.2.  For  louvre  bars, 
see  page  147.5. 


Change  of  Assignment 

5.  In -case  the  assignment  for  fabrication  is  changed  after 
the  material  for  a  contract  has  been  ordered,  the 
original  Order  Office  should  send  a  change  order  to 
the  mill  revising  the  shipping  directions;  also  copies 
of  the  mill  order  should  be  sent  to  the  fabricating 
plant  for  use  in  checking  the  material  when  received. 


PREPARATION    OF    MILL  ORDERS   AND   REQUISITIONS        47 

Change  of  Assignment — Continued 

1.  If  any  confusion  in  the  item  numbers  should  result, 
the  Order  Office  of  the  fabricating  plant  should 
instruct  mill  to  change  item  numbers.  If  the  trans- 
fer should  change  material  from  one  rolling  mill  to 
another,  the  original  Order  Office  should  cancel  and 
re-order. 


Finishing  Allowances 

2.  Allowances  for  finishing  which  do  not  appear  on  the 

advance  bill  are  to  be  made  by  the  Order  Office  in 
writing  the  mill  order. 

For  pins  and  rollers  add 

J/s"  to  fin.  dia.  up  to  4",  inclusive. 
J4"  to  fin.  dia.  4^"  to  6^",  inclusive. 
Y2"  to  fin.  dia.  6%"  to  10",  inclusive. 
9£"  to  fin.  dia.  over  10". 

The  above  allowances  are  to  be  increased  when 
necessary  to  make  ordered  diameter  agree  with 
mill  diameter  of  standard  rolled  rounds.  No 
allowance  is  to  be  made  on  mill  order  for  finishing 
the  ends  of  pins  and  rollers.  Note  "Finished 
Dimensions"  on  mill  order.  When  shafting  is  to 
be  finished,  the  Order  Office  will  make  the  same 
allowance  as  for  pins.  When  it  is  to  be  used  rough 
no  allowance  need  be  made.  For  cold  drawn  or  cold 
rolled  shafting,  no  allowance  is  required.  For 
information  about  shafting,  see  page  9.6  to  10.2. 

3.  For  finishing  the  edges  of  plates  or  slabs,  add  %"  for 

finishing  each  edge. 

4.  For  finishing  the  top  or  bottom  of   plates   or  slabs, 

add  for  each  surface  finished: 


Over 

Plates 

Slabs 

/8 

%"  to 

over 

over 

1M" 

2" 

Up  to  24" 

x24"  

TS" 

TS" 

I/" 

I/" 

24"  x  24" 

to  36"  x  36" 

A" 

y." 

Over  36" 

x  36"  .  . 

V" 

V" 

y." 

48        PREPARATION    OF    MILL   ORDERS   AND   REQUISITIONS 

Multiple  Lengths 

1.  When  material  is  ordered  in  multiple  lengths,  show 

cuts  on  the  perforated  slip  on  right  of  mill  order 
sheet.  This  slip  should  be  detached  from  copy 
sent  to  mill.  Short  pieces  of  angles  and  plates 
should  be  ordered  in  multiple  lengths  from  30  to  35 
feet  (one  car  load  length).  This,  however,  may  be 
modified  for  such  plants  as  carry  their  regular  stock 
in  special  long  lengths.  Pieces  of  different  lengths 
should  not  be  ordered  in  multiples  in  the  same  bar, 
unless  the  pieces  are  6  feet  or  less  in  length.  Exces- 
sive scrap  should  be  avoided,  but  sufficient  material 
must  be  ordered  to  cover,  as  the  shop  may  not  cut 
all  the  pieces  at  once,  and  thus  may  not  be  able  to 
utilize  the  short  ends.  When  there  are  small 
variations  in  lengths  of  pieces,  they  may  be  ordered 
in  multiples  in  same  bar,  provided  multiple  is  based 
on  longest  piece. 

2.  Tees,  zees,  beams  and  channels  should  not  be  ordered 

in  multiple  lengths  unless  the  equipment  of  the 
fabricating  plant  and  the  circumstances  render  it 
advantageous  to  do  so.  See  page  7.5  and  consult 
plant  equipment.  In  ordering  beams  and  channels 
in  multiple  lengths,  add  3/2"  f°r  each  cut,  except  for 
plants  having  beam  shears,  when  special  allowances 
for  shearing  are  to  be  made.  Consult  plant  equip- 
ment. 

3.  When  in  lengths  so  short  that  mill  will  charge  extra 

for  cutting  (see  page  17.2),  both  forged  and  rolled 
rounds  for  pins  or  rollers  should  be  ordered  in 
multiple  lengths,  providing  fabricating  plant  can 
cut  to  advantage. 

4.  In  ordering  plates  and  angles  in  multiple  lengths,  add 

I"  to  total  length. 

5.  In  ordering  rounds  in  multiple  lengths,  add  Y^'  for 

each  cut  and  1"  additional  for  rolled  rounds,  and 
3"  additional  for  forged  rounds. 

6.  For  information   relative  to  the  ordering  of   sketch 

plates,  see  pages  12.4  to  13.3.  It  is  desirable  for 
Order  Office  to  watch  the  ordering  of  sketch  plates, 
as  they  are  familiar  with  the  conditions  at  plant, 
and  may  find  it  desirable  to  eliminate  sketch  plates 
that  have  been  so  ordered  by  Drawing  Room. 
Order  Office  will  assign  a  number  to  each  plate 
ordered  sketch,  thus:  Sk.  No.  4. 


PREPARATION    OF    MILL    ORDERS   AND    REQUISITIONS        49 

Multiple  Lengths — Continued 

1.  Plates  over  1  inch  thick  should    not    be    ordered   in 

multiple  unless  desired  by  shop. 

2.  In   cases   of  large   duplication,  special  consideration 

should  be  given  to  multiple  lengths. 

The  Grouping  of  Lengths 

3.  Angles,  cover  plates  and  material  that  can  be  readily 

sheared  by  fabricating  plant,  especially  when  there 
are  a  number  of  pieces  varying  in  length  by  small 
amounts,  should  be  treated  as  follows:  All  lengths 
within  a  range  of  3  inches  should  be  grouped  as*  one 
length,  the  governing  length  being  that  of  the 
longest  piece.  The  purpose  of  this  is  to  enable  the 
shop  to  readily  pick  out  the  material. 

4.  Material  should  not  be  ordered  in  smaller  fractions 

than  1/2  inch  in  length,  except  beams  and  channels 
that  are  finished  which  if  necessary  are  to  be 
decreased  in  length  to  the  nearest  %  inch.  Other 
material  is  to  be  increased  or  decreased  to  the 
nearest  Y^  inch,  unless  noted  otherwise  on  advance 
bill.  See  page  7.7. 

Special  Beams 

5.  In   ordering  special   beams,    give   the  Section  Index 

number,  thus,  18"-B64-48  Ib.  and  note  "  Special 
Beams"  on  each  sheet. 

Slabs 

6.  Slabs  should  be  ordered  from  the  mill  on  separate 

sheets  from  other  material,  giving  finished  dimen- 
sions and  stating  that  they  are  to  be  cold-sawed  to 
length  or  that  they  may  be  cut  to  length  by  an  oxy- 
acetylene  flame.  A  variation  of  +  J^  inch  is  per- 
mitted in  any  dimension.  Do  not  specify  physical 
tests  but  order  to  the  following  chemical  test : 

Carbon 20  to  .30  per  cent. 

Sulphur 04  per  cent. 

Phosphorus 04  per  cent. 

Manganese Normal. 

For  limiting  sizes,  see  page  113.2. 


5O        PREPARATION    OF    MILL   ORDERS   AND   REQUISITIONS 

Slabs — Continued 

1.  At  Pencoyd  Mills  8",   10",   12",   13",   14"  and  16" 

plates  (but  not  intermediate  widths)  can  be  rolled 
to  a  maximum  thickness  of  3  inch.  Plates  thicker 
than  1^/8  inch  cannot  be  rolled  in  the  finishing  rolls, 
therefore  physical  tests  should  not  be  specified. 

Gas  Pipe 

2.  When  requirements  will  permit,   order  gas  pipe  in 

lineal  feet  and  specify  random  lengths. 

Rivet  Rods  and  Tie  Rods 

3.  Rivet    rods    should    always   be   specified  ^4"  scant 

diameter,  and  in  lengths  to  suit  fabricating  plant. 

4.  When  advance  bill  specifies  "Cold  Rolled  Threads'' 

for  tie  rods,  order  proper  diameter  to  suit  the 
requirements  of  threading  machine  to  be  used. 

Reserving  and  Charging  of  Stock 

5.  In  regard  to  reserving  stock  or  charging  stock  to 

order,  the  equipment  of  plants,  organization,  class 
of  work  handled,  size  of  plants,  and  amount  of 
stock  carried  vary  too  much  for  a  uniform  system 
to  be  adopted. 

Compare  Tonnage 

6.  Discrepancies  between  estimated  weight  and  ordered 

weight  on  lump  sum  contracts  should  be  reported 
to  the  Division  Engineer  as  soon  as  possible. 

Material  to  be  Galvanized 

7.  An  instruction  should  appear  on  the  mill  order  for 

structural  material  which  is  to  be  galvanized  that 
no  paint  marks  are  to  be  placed  thereon.  See  pages 
117.1  and  118.1. 


TYPICAL   DRAWINGS  51 

CHAPTER  IV 
TYPICAL   DRAWINGS 

Purpose  of  Typical  Drawings 

1.  The  purpose  of  the  Typical  Drawings  is  to  show  how 

Detail  Drawings,  Erection  Drawings  and  Bills 
should  be  made;  to  illustrate  the  best  methods  of 
showing  and  dimensioning  the  various  types  of 
details  found  in  the  classes  of  structures  covered, 
and  to  produce  clear  drawings  and  bills,  uniform  in 
appearance,  with  all  unnecessary  work  eliminated. 

2.  The  Typical  Drawings  have  not  been  prepared  for 

the  purpose  of  advocating  any  particular  type  of 
construction  or  detail,  but  to  illustrate  the  approved 
method  of  showing  and  dimensioning  those  types 
and  details  covered. 

3.  It  is  not  practicable  to  have  these  drawings  cover  all 

classes  of  structures  nor  all  types  of  details.  Their 
scope  is  sufficient  to  illustrate  the  general  principles 
involved.  With  these  in  view  the  same  principles 
can  be  applied  to  all  classes  of  structures  and  all 
types  of  details. 

4.  The  Typical  Drawings  are,  therefore,  to  be  used  as 

a  general  guide  in  the  preparation  of  detail  drawings 
for  all  classes  of  structures.  Their  applicability 
must  be  determined  upon  the  basis  of  experience 
and  common  sense. 

Limitations  of  Typical  Drawings 

5.  While  these  drawings  have  been  prepared  to  meet 

the  general  requirements  of  the  Operating  and 
Erection  Departments,  variations  are  to  be  made 
from  them  when  necessary  to  adapt  the  work  to 
individual  requirements  of  the  fabricating  plant  or 
of  the  Erection  Department.  The  requirements  of 
the  multiple  punch,  the  methods  of  rivet  spacing, 
and  the  limitations  of  plant  equipments  should  be 
borne  in  mind. 


52  TYPICAL   DRAWINGS 

Omissions  from  Drawings 

1.  Attention  is  called  to  the  omission  of   unnecessary 

dotted    lines,    cross-hatching    and    blackening    of 
sections. 

2.  Attention   is   called   to   the   omission   of   rivet   signs 

though  sufficient  rivets  must  be  shown  to  make 
drawings  clear. 

3.  Attention  is  called  to  the  omission  of  sections  for 

simple  members.     The  section,  however,  must  be 
drawn  when  the  detail  or  the  member  is  complicated. 


Special  Features  on  Erection  Plans 

4.  On  Erection  Plans  for  office  buildings,  sections  showing 

the  relation  of  the  architectural  details  to  the  steel 
work  should  be  drawn  wherever  required.  If  these 
sections  become  too  elaborate  or  involved,  they 
should  be  made  on  data  sheets  instead  of  on 
Erection  Plans. 

5.  The   elaborateness   of   Erection   Plans   must   depend 

upon  the  nature  of  the  information  furnished  by 
the  architect  and  upon  the  size  and  complexity  of 
the  structure.  The  Erection  Plans  for  a  building 
where  it  is  necessary  to  adapt  the  steel  design  to 
architectural  plans  lacking  detailed  information 
should  be  very  complete.  This  is  necessary  in 
order  to  show  the  relation  of  the  architectural 
details  to  the  steel  work  for  the  consideration  of  the 
architect  and  the  information  of  the  detailers.  If 
complete  information  is  given  on  the  steel  design 
plans,  or  if  on  small  orders  one  or  two  men  make  all 
the  drawings  from  the  architectural  plans,  the 
Erection  Plans  need  be  only  line  diagrams  with 
erection  marks. 

6.  The  list  of  material  given  on  any  Erection  Plan  should 

be  only  that  required  for  the  portion  of  the  building 
shown  on  that  sheet. 

7.  For  railway  bridges  a  cross  section  of  the  floor  showing 

ties,  track  bolts,  etc.,  should  be  placed  on  the 
Erection  Plan  if  the  American  Bridge  Co.  furnishes 
or  frames  the  ties  or  furnishes  the  floor  bolts. 


TYPICAL   DRAWINGS  53 

Drafting  Instructions 

1.  The  general  arrangement  and  dimensions  should  be 

as  shown  on  the  Typical  Drawings. 

2.  In  general,  the  first  dimension  line  should  be  Y%  in. 

away  from  the  sketch,  and  other  dimension  lines 
5xi6  in.  apart. 

3.  Main  dimensions,  main  material  and  erection  marks 

should  be  made  heavy,  as  shown. 

4.  In  giving  notes,  the  size  of  lettering  should  be  in 

proportion  to  the  importance  of  the  note. 

5.  The  size  of  the  erection  marks  should  be  in  proportion 

to  the  importance  of  the  member. 

6.  In  using  heavy  letters  and  figures,  these  should  be 

only  as  heavy  as  can  be  made  with  one  stroke  of  the 
pen. 

7.  Details  on  or  near  which  the  size  of  the  material 

cannot  be  clearly  written  should  have  material 
billed  to  one  side,  and  assembling  marks  repeated 
on  sketch. 

8.  Avoid  showing  too  much  on  one  sheet.     Use  extra 

sheets  rather  than  complicate  the  drawing  with 
too  many  notes.  Avoid  the  use  of  notes  unless 
they  can  be  made  clear  and  concise. 

9.  The  American  Bridge  Company's  Standard  lettering 

as  given  in  the  "  Standards  for  Detailing,"  is  to  be 
used  exclusively. 


54  TYPICAL  DRAWINGS 

List  of  Typical  Drawings 

OFFICE  BUILDING   CONSTRUCTION 

Sheet— El Plan  of  Grillage. 

E2 Plan  of  Ball  Room  Floor. 

1 Grillage  Girders. 

2 Smoke  Stack 

Gl Columns,  Plate  and  Angle,  with 

Seated  Connection. 

G2 Columns,  Plate  and  Angle,  with 

Brackets. 

G3 Columns,  Plate  and  Angle,  with 

Inserted  Gusset. 

G4 Columns,  Plate  and  Channel,  with 

Seated  Connection. 

G5 Columns,  Plate  and  Angle,  with 

Framed  Connection. 

XI Column  Rivet  Spacing. 

G6 Girders  with  Seated  Beam  Con- 
nection. 

G7 Girders  with  Framed  Beam  Con- 
nection. 

G8 Girders  with  End  Gussets. 

G9 "         "      End  Framing. 

Fl Beams. 

F2 .     " 

F3 " 

F4 " 

F5 " 

F6 " 

F7 " 

F8 " 

F9 Stair  Horses. 

F10 Miscellaneous  Framing. 

Fll 

F12 Dormer  Frames. 

Cl Cast  Iron  Bases. 

C2 Cast  Iron  Columns. 

Al .Schedule. 

A2 " 

SX1 Summary  of  Duplicate  Pieces. 

SX2 

X2 Duplicate  Pieces. 

Dl. .  .  .Column  Dimensions. 


TYPICAL   DRAWINGS  65 

List  of  Typical  Drawings — Continued 

OFFICE  BUILDING  CONSTRUCTION— Continued 

Sheet— C201 Slabs. 

C202 Miscellaneous  Castings,  etc. 

C203 Fittings. 

EF201 Field  Rivets  and  Bolts,    Erector's 

List. 
B501 Shop   and   Shipping   Bill,     Beams 

(Domestic). 
B601 Shop   and   Shipping   Bill,     Beams 

(Export). 

R201 Shipping  Bill,  Columns. 

K201 Index  to  Marks. 

MILL  BUILDING  CONSTRUCTION 

Sheet— El Anchor  Bolt  Plan. 

E2 Erection  Diagram. 

E3 " 

E4 "  "       Sheet  Steel. 

E5 "  "  " 

1 Columns. 

2 

3 

4 

5 Girders  and  Truss. 

6 " 

7 Trusses. 

8 and  Monitor. 

9 Rafters  and  Girts. 

10 Girts. 

11 " 

12 Trusses. 

13 "       and  Monitor. 

14 Bracing. 

15 Girts,  Struts,  etc. 

E101 Erection    Diagram,    Sheet    Steel, 

Gutters,  Conductors,  etc. 

101 Trusses  (Export) 

102 Hemispherical  Tank. 

103 Steel  Doors. 

104 Gas  Pipe  Railing. 

Kl Index  to  Marks. 

Cl Anchor  Bolts. 

C2 Purlins. 

C3.  .Rods. 


56  TYPICAL   DRAWINGS 

List  of  Typical  Drawings — Continued 

MILL   BUILDING  CONSTRUCTION— Continued 

U     Sheet— C4 Rail  Fittings. 

C5 Field  Rivets  and  Bolts. 

EF1 Truss  Diagram. 

EF2 "  " 

EF3 Crane  Clearance. 

EF4 Field  Rivets  and  Bolts,  Erector's 


List. 


SCI Sheet  Steel. 

SC2 Sheet  Steel  Fastenings. 

SC3 Louvre  Brackets  and  Bars. 

Bl Shop  and  Shipping  Bill,  Columns. 

B2 "  "  "     Trusses. 

B3 "  "     Rafters 

and  Girts. 

SX1 Summary  Duplicate  Pieces. 

SC104 Conductors  and  Gutters. 

SC105 Metal  Windows. 

SC107 Wooden  Windows. 

A101 Schedule. 

B101,  B102..  .Shop  and  Shipping  Bill,  Trusses 
(Export) 

R101 Export  Marks,  Numbers,  etc. 

RAILWAY  PIN  CONNECTED  SPAN 

Stress  Sheet. 

Sheet — Dl General  Drawing. 

D2 

El Erection  Diagram. 

1 Shoes. 

2 End  Posts. 

3 Top  Chords. 

4  "         « 

5 Bottom  Chords. 

6 Vertical  Posts  and  Hangers. 

7 Floor  Beams. 

8 Stringers. 

9 Bottom  Laterals. 

10 Portals. 

11 Top  Laterals. 

12 Top  Lateral  Plates. 

13 Pedestals. 

Cl. Rocker  Nests. 

C2 Pins. 

C3 Eye  Bars. 

C4..  ..Bolts. 


TYPICAL   DRAWINGS  57 

List  of  Typical  Drawings — Continued 

RAILWAY  RIVETED  TRUSS  SPAN  <     2 

Stress  Sheet.  %'  7  ~* 

Sheet— Dl General  Drawing. 

D2 b.    Z    >Q? 

El Erection  Diagram.  bl    Q 

1 Shoes. 

2 End  Posts. 

3 Top  Chords.  t, 

4 Bottom  Chords. 

r  II  (I  <,        t.        >" 

3 Cow 

6 Intermediate  Posts. 

7 Floor  Beams.  ft?    Z    £ 

8 Stringers.  W    Id    DC 

9 Top  Laterals. 

10 Bottom  Laterals. 

11 Pedestals. 

Cl Rocker  Nests. 

C2 Pins. 

SI Shop  Bill. 

EF1 Field  Rivets,  Erector's  List. 

RAILWAY  PLATE  GIRDER  SPANS 

Sheet — 1 Square  Deck  Span  Girders. 

2 Square  Deck  Span  Cross  Frames 

and  Erection  Plan. 

1 Square  Through  Span  Girders. 

2 Square  Through  Span  Floor  Beams 

and  Stringers. 
3 Square  Through  Span  Laterals  and 

Erection  Plan. 

1 Skew  Deck  Span  Girders. 

2 Skew  Deck  Span  Cross  Frames 

and  Erection  Plan. 

SI Shop  Bill,  Main  Girders. 

*  S2. . .- Shop  Bill,  Floor  Beams  and 

Stringers. 

S3 .  .Shop  Bill,  Floor  Beam  Brackets. 

Cl Cast  Steel  Pedestals. 

C2 Field  Rivets  and  Bolts. 

EF1 Field  Rivets  and  Bolts,  Erector's 

List. 

Rl Shipping  Bill  (Domestic). 

R101 Shipping  Bill  (Export). 


58   PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING   BILLS 

CHAPTER  V 

THE  PREPARATION  OF  DETAIL 
DRAWINGS,  SHOP  AND  SHIPPING  BILLS 

GENERAL  DETAILING 
Reference  Lines 

1.  The  main  pieces  in  the  structure  should  always  be 

tied  to  reference  lines.  Thus:  for  railway  bridges 
the  plate  girders,  shoes  and  posts,  stringers  and 
floor  beams  should  be  tied  to  base  of  rail  and 
masonry;  for  highway  bridges  the  same  pieces 
should  be  tied  to  crown  of  roadway  and  masonry; 
for  office  buildings,  warehouses,  etc.,  all  column 
connections  and  girders  should  be  tied  to  floor 
lines.  In  work  where  base  line  reference  is  used, 
elevations  of  important  points  on  columns,  girders 
and  trusses  should  be  given,  using  common  points 
for  connecting  pieces. 

2.  Erection  plans  of  office  buildings,  warehouses,  large 

power  houses,  etc.,  should  give  sufficient  informa- 
tion to  establish  elevation  of  pieces  without  con- 
sulting details. 

Field  Connections 

3.  Field  connections  must  be  tied  to  reference  lines  and 

connecting  pieces.  They  should  also  be  tied  to 
working  points  of  member  independent  of  rivet 
spacing.  Crosswise  spacing  of  open  holes  should 
be  in  even  inches  or  half  inches,  throwing  the 
smaller  fractions  into  the  gauges  of  the  angles. 

4.  On  large  orders  where  open  holes  are  reamed  to  an 

iron  templet  and  field  connections  duplicated 
throughout,  a  system  of  numbered  reaming  templets 
should  be  used  and  so  noted  on  drawings. 

5.  When  detail  is  complicated  it  is  often  desirable  to 

show  connecting  members  in  red. 

6.  For  such  members  as  diagonals  or  laterals,  the  distance 

center  to  center  of  end  or  other  convenient  holes 
should  be  given  and  spacing  of  open  holes  figured 
parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  member. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     59 

GENERAL  DETAILING 

Referring  from  One  Drawing  to  Another 

1.  The   only   allowable   references   from   one   sheet   to 

another  are  for  rivet  spacing,  cuts  and  bevels.  The 
material,  assembling  marks  and  outline  should 
always  be  given  and  should  not  be  referred  from 
one  sheet  to  another.  In  referring  from  one  sheet 
to  another,  be  sure  the  information  is  given  on  the 
sheet  to  which  the  reference  is  made  and  not  in 
turn  referred  to  another  sheet. 

2.  When  two  or  more  sheets  are  noted  to  be  worked 

together,  they  are  to  be  considered  one  sheet  as  far 
as  instructions  in  this  article  are  concerned^ 

3.  When  size  of  member  is  too  large  to  be  detailed  on 

one  sheet  or  when  other  members  are  required 
differing  only  in  minor  points  which  cannot  be 
shown  on  the  same  sheet,  use  two  sheets  and  note 
on  drawings  that  sheets  are  to  be  worked  together. 

Referring  from  One  Member  to  Another  on    Same 
Sheet 

4.  Reference  from  one  member  to  another  on  the  same 

sheet  is  allowable  for  rivet  spacing,  holes,  material, 
sketch,  etc. 

5.  In  detailing  similar  members  on  the  same  sheet  the 

detail  should  be  complete  for  the  first  member;  for 
subsequent  members  only  the  parts  that  are  differ- 
ent should  be  drawn  and  figured.  Notes  should 

read  "  Parts  not  shown  same  as 

(first  member). "  The  main  material  should  always 
be  repeated  for  referred  members. 

6.  In  referring  from  one  member  to  another  on  the  same 

sheet,  be  sure  that  the  information  is  given  on 
member  referred  to  and  not  referred  in  turn  to 
another  member.  An  exception  may  be  made 
when  the  member  referred  to  has  only  rivet  spacing 
referred  to  another  member. 

Methods  of  Rivet  Spacing 

7.  Rivet  spacing  on  all  classes  of  work  may  be  made 

uniform,  recorded  and  summarized  on  X  Duplicate 
sheets  to  which  reference  should  be  made  on  the 
detail  drawing  by  a  system  of  letters. 


6O    PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

GENERAL  DETAILING 

Methods  of  Rivet  Spacing — Continued 

1.  The  rivet  spacing  may  not  be  definitely  fixed  on  the 

detail  drawings  but  indicated  by  the  letters  "R" 
(about  3  inch  spacing)  and  "P"  (6  inch  maximum 
spacing).  The  extent  of  the  R  and  P  spacing 
should  be  indicated  (but  not  figured  unless  neces- 
sary) on  a  dimension  line  which  should  start  at 
the  first  hole  or  rivet  in  the  member.  When  the 
R  spacing  includes  a  series  of  open  holes  or  extends 
by  a  detail  piece,  it  indicates  that  the  holes  are 
spaced  exactly  3  inches  or  that  the  rivets  in  the 
detail  are  spaced  exactly  3  inches. 

2.  Spacing  other  than  3  inches  and  6  inches  should  have 

the  maximum  allowable  space  noted. 

3.  For  girders  and  miscellaneous  building  work  where 

the  foregoing  does  not  apply  and  for  bridge  work 
if  permitted  by  the  purchaser,  give  the  maximum 
allowable  spacing  between  points  indicated. 

4.  For  roof  trusses  and  similar  work,  establish  a  unit 

space  (say  2^  inches  or  3  inches)  for  each  sheet, 
figuring  all  other  spacing.  Note  on  each  sheet 
"  Spacing  not  given in." 

5.  Gauges  and  spacing  not  figured  on  the  drawings  of 

columns  are  determined  as  follows: 

For  seat,  top,  cap  and  base  angles,  the  gauges  for 
legs  against  column  shaft  shall  be: 

l%"  for  legs  less  than  6". 
1M"  and  3"  for  6"  legs. 

For  seat  and  top  angles,  the  gauges,  of  open  holes 
in  outstanding  legs  shall  be: 

2J/£"  for  legs  less  than  6". 
2y2"  and  2M"  for  6"  legs. 

At  ends  of  columns  the  spacing  vertically  of  all 
rivets  or  open  holes  from  finished  ends  shall  be: 

\%"         3"         3"         3"         etc. 

For  stiffeners  and  gussets  the  spacing  vertically 
of  all  rivets  from  top  of  seat  angles  shall  be: 

1"         3"         3"         3"         etc. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     61 

GENERAL  DETAILING 
Methods  of  Rivet  Spacing — Continued 

1.  None    of    the    foregoing    methods    of    rivet    spacing 

relieve  the  draftsman  of  the  responsibility  of  show- 
ing where  rivets  should  stagger  for  driving  or  of 
giving  dimensions  where  details  on  other  faces  of 
the  member  must  be  cleared. 

2.  Consider   requirements    of   fabricating    plant    before 

adopting  any  of  the  foregoing  methods  of  showing 
rivet  spacing. 

3.  In    general,    spacing    of   open   holes   should    not    be 

referred  from  one  sheet  to  another,  but  should  be 
repeated,  except  where  there  are  large  groups.  In 
such  cases  a  duplication  mark  can  be  given  to  each 
group  and  an  "X"  sheet  prepared  giving  these 
details  and  their  duplication  marks.  This  may  also 
be  done  by  a  system  of  numbered  reaming  templets 
referred  to  on  page  58.4. 

4.  The  splices  for  office  building  columns  are  an  exception 

to  the  foregoing  rule. 

5.  Although  it  is  not  necessary  to  give  rivet  spacing  for 

a  detail  piece  which  bears  the  assembling  mark 
given  it  on  another  sheet,  care  must  be  used  to 
give  all  information  necessary  to  detail  pieces 
which  are  not  referred  to  another  sheet. 

6.  When  two  or  more  sheets  are  noted  to  be  worked 

together,  they  are  to  be  considered  as  one  sheet  as 
far  as  this  article  is  concerned. 


Rights  and  Lefts 

7.  Drawings  should  always  show  the  right  hand.     The 

letters  "R"  and  "L"  are  sufficient  for  making 
rights  and  lefts  without  noting  that  they  are  right 
and  left. 

8.  When  the  letters  "R"  and  "L"  are  not  used,  as  on 

columns  for  office  building  work,  bill  as  follows: 
One  Column  1  (O-2). 
One  Column  3  (O-2)  Left. 


62     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

GENERAL  DETAILING 
Rights  and  Lefts — Continued 

1.  When  a  member  is  shown  and  another  member  is 

left  of  same  with  exceptions,  one  of  which  could  be 
covered  by  a  note  and  the  other  by  a  sketch,  the 
sketch  must  always  show  the  left  as  it  will  be  built 
and  not  a  right  of  the  left. 

Call  for  pieces  as  follows: 
2  Columns  C-l. 

2  Columns  C-2    (Left    except    cap    plate   as 
shown  and  per  note  "F"). 

2.  The  letters  "R"  and  "L"  should  not  be  used  unless 

members  are  exact  rights  and  lefts. 

Angles  Cut  from  Larger  Sizes 

3.  In  cutting  down  the  leg  of  an  angle,  the  order  columns 

of  the  shop  bill  and  not  the  drawing,  should  state 
from  what  size  leg  the  angle  is  cut.  Specify  actual 
cut  size  on  drawing  and  locate  edge  distance. 
Show  cut  width  of  leg  by  dimension  lines  and  figures, 
to  guard  against  shop  overlooking  cut. 

Cross  Hatching 

4.  The    blackening    and    cross    hatching    of    sections, 

sectional  plans  or  any  portion  of  them,  is  to  be 
omitted  as  far  as  practicable.  It  should  only  be 
resorted  to  in  drawing  complicated  details  or  in 
showing  different  kinds  of  material  side  by  side. 

Show  Few  Rivets 

5.  Long  lines  of  shop  rivets  should  not  be  shown.     It  is 

only  necessary  to  show  the  first  two  or  three  rivets 
at  ends  or  two  or  three  additional  ones  where  it  is 
necessary  to  show  the  stagger  of  certain  lines. 

Holes  in  but  One  View 

6.  Open  holes,  except  for  complicated  connections,  need 

be  shown  only  in  their  proper  view. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     63 

GENERAL  DETAILING 
Column  Faces 

1.  For  office  building  columns,  all  faces  that  are  different 

should  be  shown,  but  connections  on  side  for  other 
faces  need  not  to  be  shown  except  when  necessary 
to  show  some  special  connection.  It  is  not  neces- 
sary to  direct  the  shop  to  mark  the  faces  of  columns 
with  direction  in  which  they  face  in  the  building, 
except  as  noted  on  page  110.1-. 
For  column  face  marks,  see  page  96.5. 

Bracket  Holes  Matching 

2.  It  is  not  necessary  to  note  on  drawing  that  holes  in 

top  and  bottom  brackets  match.     It  is  understood 
that  they  always  match  unless  noted  otherwise. 
Notes 

3.  Omit  from  the  detail  drawings  (except  for  castings 

and  eyebars)  all  general  notes  covering  material, 
paint,  inspection,  specifications,  erection  and  special 
export  marks  (page  126.1),  unless  required  by  the 
customer  or  plant.  When  required,  notes  covering 
these  points  may  be  placed  on  the  first  sheet  and  all 
the  other  sheets  referred.  On  drawings  for  castings 
and  eyebars,  the  notes  should  cover  the  material, 
specifications,  inspection  and  paint. 

4.  If  painting  is  uniform  throughout  an  order,   paint 

notes  are  not  required  on  drawings,-  except  for 
grillage  beams,  slabs,  eyebars  and  castings,  the 
drawings  for  which  should  be  noted  "Paint"  or 
"No  Paint." 

5.  If  painting  is  not  uniform  throughout  an  order,  each 

sheet  should  give  complete  painting  instructions. 

6.  If  workmanship  is  special,  a  note  should  appear  on 

each  sheet  where  it  applies  but  on  no  others.  To 
illustrate:  Some  specifications  require  that  the 
connections  of  tension  members  shall  be  reamed; 
this  note  should  be  placed  on  drawing  of  tension 
members  but  not  on  drawings  of  floor  beams  and 
stringers.  The  men  in  the  shop  cannot  always  tell 
which  parts  of  the  structure  are  tension  members. 

7.  Workmanship  notes  should  be  explicit  and  should  be 

an  interpretation  of  the  customer's  specifications 
as  applied  to  the  individual  sheet  upon  which  they 
appear.  A  verbatim  repetition  of  a  clause  in  the 
specification  is  apt  to  cause  friction  between  the 
shop  and  the  customer's  inspector. 


64     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

GENERAL  DETAILING 

Finishing. 

1.  All   finishing   required    should    be    clearly    noted    on 

drawings.  Such  milling  as  is  done  in  the  shops 
to  aid  them  in  properly  fitting  up  the  work  need 
not  be  noted. 

2.  Bearing  ends  of  all  important  stiffeners  should  be 

marked  "FIN.  STIF."  on  detail  drawings,  unless 
general  notes  on  the  sheet  call  for  all  stiffeners  to 
be  finished. 

3.  When  plates  are  surface  planed,  write  ordered  thick- 

ness on  drawing  thus: 

34"  x  I'  1%"  planed  from  i%a",  or 
to  2"  x  1'  4"  planed 
from  3". 

Pin  Holes 

4.  Give  size  of  both  pin  and  pin  hole  on  details  of  chords, 

shoes,  bolsters,  etc.,  thus :     "  Pin  Hole  3^"  +  %a"." 

Gas  Pipe  Railing 

5.  The  details  of  gas  pipe  railing  should  conform  to  the 

general  scheme  shown  on  the  typical  drawing.  If 
the  customer's  design  indicates  some  other  type  of 
detail  and  fittings,  an  effort  should  be  made  to 
obtain  in  advance  his  approval  of  a  design  which 
will  permit  the  use  of  our  standard  fittings.  See 
pages  5.14  and  6.4. 

Drawings  and  Bills  for  Duplicate  Members 

6.  Duplicate    members    on    different    orders    may    be 

handled  together  on  the  drawings,  but  should  be 
separated  on  mill  orders,  shop  and  shipping  bills. 

Drawings  and  Bills  for  Different  Classes  of  Material 

7.  Different  classes  of  material  going  to  different  shops 

should,  as  far  as  practicable,  be  put  on  separate 
drawings  and  bills.  Items  purchased  by  Contract- 
ing or  Purchasing  Department  should  be  on  separate 
drawings  and  bills  for  the  two  departments  and 
separate  from  the  items  furnished  by  plant. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     65 

GENERAL  DETAILING 

Erector's  List  of  Field  Rivets 

1.  On  the  erector's  list  of  field  rivets  for  office  buildings, 

the  location  noted  should  be  general  for  each  tier. 
Thus:  Beams  to  Beams;  Beams  to  Columns; 
Beams  to  Girders;  Column  Splices. 

2.  On  other  classes  of  work,  as  far  as  practicable,  the 

rivets  required  at  any  point  should  be  listed  to- 
gether, and  it  should  be  noted  for  what  point  they 
are  required.  The  purpose  of  this  is  to  enable  the 
erector  to  readily  pick  out  all  the  rivets  required 
by  a  riveting  gang  at  that  point. 

Inter=Shop  Orders 

3.  Material  which  is  furnished  by  one  department  to 

another  department  of  the  same  plant  for  the 
manufacture  of  any  part  of  a  contract  should  be 
detailed  and  listed  on  an  inter-shop  order  (Form 

D78). 


Titles  for  Drawings 

4.  The  titles  on  large  drawings  should  be  uniform  for 
each  order  and  located  near  the  lower  right  hand 
corner  of  the  drawing.  Titles  should  be  clear, 
short  and  as  concise  as  is  consistent  with  an  intelli- 
gent description  of  the  work.  On  building  work  it 
is  not  necessary  to  give  anything  further  than  the 
name  of  the  structure,  except  on  export  work  when 
the  order  number  of  the  U.  S.  Steel  Products  Co. 
should  appear  on  every  drawing. 


Lettering 

5.  All  lettering  and  figures  used  on  drawings  should  be 
clear,  simple  and  without  embellishments.  Use  the 
system  of  lettering  adopted  by  the  American  Bridge 
Company  as  shown  in  the  Standards  for  Detailing. 


66     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

DETAILING  OF  BEAMS 

General 

1.  The  dimensions  required  and  arrangement  of  views 

should  be  as  shown  on  the  Typical  Beam  Sketches 
to  which  reference  should  be  made  in  reading  these 
instructions. 

2.  Except   for    small   orders   only    one   size    of    beams 

should  be  detailed  on  a  sheet. 

Multiple  Beam  Punch 

3.  The  requirements  of  the  multiple  beam  punch  should 

always  be  considered  in  determining  web  punching. 
Special  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  spacing 
crosswise  of  beam,  so  that  the  beam  can  go  through 
the  punch  without  being  moved  sideways. 

4.  Tie  rod  holes  can  usually  be  shifted  an  inch  or  so  to 

line  up  with  other  holes  in  the  beam. 

5.  Special  connection  angles  and  special  separators  can 

often  be  used  to  advantage  in  adapting  the  punching 
of  beam  to  the  requirements  of  the  multiple  punch. 
The  desirability  of  doing  this  is  dependent  upon  the 
amount  of  duplication  and  upon  the  practice  of 
the  fabricating  plant. 

6.  Roof  work,  in  general,  should  be  detailed  so  that  the 

beam  punching  suits  the  requirements  of  the 
multiple  punch.  This  can  be  done  by  making  holes 
square  with  the  beam  and  beveling  same  in  connec- 
tion angles.  An  exception  is  to  be  made  to  this 
for  complicated  beams  forming  hips  and  valleys, 
when  it  is  not  practicable  to  adapt  the  punching  to 
the  requirements  of  the  multiple  punch. 

Web  and  Flange  Holes 

7.  In  general  the  distance  from  the  bottom  of  beam  or 

channel  to  the  first  hole  of  any  group  of  holes  should 
be  given.  In  cases  where  it  is  necessary  to  keep 
the  tops  of  the  beams  flush,  give  the  distance  from 
the  top  instead  of  bottom  to  the  first  hole.  If  the 
holes  in  the  web  or  connections  are  3  inches  apart 
crosswise  of  beam,  the  3  inches  need  not  be  given, 
as  this  is  the  standard  spacing  crosswise  of  beam. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     67 

DETAILING  OF  BEAMS 

Web  and  Flange  Holes — Continued 

1.  When  the  holes  in  web  are  5J/2  inches  apart  lengthwise 

of  beam,  the  5J^  inches  need  not  be  given,  as  this  is 
standard  spacing.  All  other  lengthwise  spacing 
must  be  given  except  the  distance  between  the  two 
tie  rod  holes  which  should  be  marked  "T"  indicat- 
ing to  the  shop  that  this  distance  c.  to  c.  can  vary 
to  suit  the  requirements  of  the  multiple  punch. 

2.  Holes  for  spiking  pieces  and  other  holes  not  requiring 

exact  spacing  should  be  so  marked  on  the  drawing. 
The  shop  will  then  know  that  small  variations  in 
the  punching  are  allowable. 

3.  Holes  and  rivets  required  for  fastening  spiking  pieces, 

buckle  plates,  curb  angles  and  skew-back  angles 
running  lengthwise  of  the  beam  should  be  spaced 
in  multiples  of  3  inches,  so  that  the  shop  can  use 
standard  strip  templets  for  laying  out  these  holes. 
This  spacing  can  be  made  in  multiples  of  3  inches 
by  throwing  the  variation  into  the  first  or  last  space. 

4.  Top  view  or  sectional  bottom  view  should  be  shown 

when  beams  have  plates  connected  by  staggered 
rivets,  or  when  a  definite  stagger  of  open  holes  is 
required.  If  this  is  not  shown,  there  is  danger  of  a 
misfit  caused  by  a  reverse  stagger. 


Extension  Figures 

5.  Extension  figures  are  distances  from  a  definite  point 

at  the  left  end  of  the  beam  to  any  group  of  holes. 

6.  Except  for  continuous  lines  of  holes  or  rivets,  extension 

figures  should  be  given  to  the  first  hole  or  rivet  or 
to  the  center  or  working  point  of  groups  of  holes  or 
rivets. 

7.  When  beams  have  square  connection  angles  or  connec- 

tion angles  with  small  bevels  (as  explained  in  the 
Typical  Beam  Sketches),  extension  figures  are  to 
be  given  from  the  face  of  the  left  connection. 


68    PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

DETAILING  OF  BEAMS 
Extension  Figures — Continued 

1.  When   a   beam   has   one   end   milled,   the  extension 

should  be  given  from  the  milled  end. 

2.  When  beams  are  cut  square  with  bevelled  connection 

angles  (except  for  small  bevels,  as  explained  in  the 
Typical  Beam  Sketches),  extension  figures  are  to 
be  given  from  the  end  of  the  beam. 

3.  When  beams  are  cut  on  a  vertical  bevel,  extension 

figures  are  to  be  given  from  one  of  the  end  holes  or 
rivets  in  the  end  of  the  beam. 

4.  To  avoid  any  misunderstanding,  the  dimension  line 

for  the  extension  figure  locating  the  first  connection 
from  the  left  end  of  the  beam  should  always  run 
unbroken  to  the  point  from  which  the  extension 
is  given. 

Standard  Connection  Angles 

5.  For  two-sided  connections,  the  distance  between  the 

holes  in  outstanding  legs  is  constant,  and  5^  inches, 
i.  e.,  the  holes  are  2%  inches  each  side  of  the  center 
line  of  web  of  beam  or  channel.  The  variation  in 
web  thickness  for  various  size  beams  or  channels 
is  taken  up  by  the  variation  in  the  gauge  of  the 
angles. 

6.  An  outline  sketch  of  a  connection  at  the  end  of  the 

beam  or  channel  without  any  marks  or  figures, 
indicates  a  standard  two-angle  connection.  If  one 
standard  connection  angle  is  required,  it  must  be 
so  noted  on  the  drawing. 

7.  If  a  standard  one-sided  connection  angle  is  required, 

the  letter  "M"  placed  upon  the  sketch  will  indicate 
same. 


Special  Connection  Angles 

8.  When  details  are  used  that  are  not  standard,  they  must 
be  completely  detailed  once  on  each  sheet,  except 
that  3  inches  crosswise  spacing  need  not  be  given. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     69 

DETAILING  OF  BEAMS 

Beveled  Connections 

1.  For  small  bevels  refer  to  instructions  in  the  Standards 

for  Detailing. 

2.  Beams  with  beveled  connections,  where  the   working 

point  falls  outside  of  the  beam,-  should  have  the 
first  rivet  or  hole  in  beam  located  from  working 
point  by  dimensions  both  parallel  to  and  at  right 
angles  to  beam. 

3.  Complicated  details  of  beams  should  be  drawn   to 

scale. 


Open  Holes  in  Connection  Angles 

4.  Square    connection    angles,    connection    angles    with 

horizontal  bevels  and  connection  angles  with  small 
vertical  bevels  (as  explained  in  the  Typical  Beam 
Sketches),  should  have  the  distance  given  from  the 
top  or  bottom  of  beam  to  the  first  hole  in  connection 
angles.  Beams  framed  and  resting  on  seats  should 
have  distance  from  bottom  to  first  hole  given.  No 
other  figures  are  necessary  for  standard  connection 
angles. 

5.  Connection  angles  with   vertical  bevels,   except  for 

small  bevels  (as  explained  in  the  Typical  Beam 
.Sketches),  should  have  the  distance  given  from  the 
working  point  to  the  first  hole  in  connection  angles. 

6.  Special  connection  angles  should  have  the  distance 

c.  to  c.  of  open  holes  given,  even  though  the  angles 
are  detailed  on  the  same  sheet. 


Assembling  Marks 

7.  Except  for  standard    connection    angles,   assembling 

marks  should  be  given  for  all  detail  pieces. 

8.  When  it  is  anticipated  that  pieces  will  be  used  on 

several  sheets,  either  the  "X  Duplicate"  system  or 
the  " Ordinary"  system  of  assembling  marks  may 
be  used.  See  pages  83.2  to  85.4.  Give  prefer- 
ence to  "X  Duplicate"  system. 


7O     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

DETAILING  OF  BEAMS 
Coping 

1.  Coping  into  beams  or  channels  should  be  shown  as 

indicated  in  the  Typical  Beam  Sketches  giving 
depth  and  weight  of  beam  or  channel  into  which  it 
is  coped. 

2.  When  beams  are  combined  on  the  same  sketch  and 

coped  into  different  weights  or  sizes,  the  cope  for 
the  largest  or  heaviest  size  beam  should  be  specified 
so  as  to  have  similarity  in  the  beams  and  to  eliminate 
notations  for  each  particular  cope. 

Cutting  and  Blocking 

3.  Cutting  or  blocking  flanges  or  webs  of  beams  and 

channels  should  be  shown  as  indicated  in  the 
Typical  Beam  Sketches.  When  flanges  are  cut,  it 
should  be  stated  whether  or  not  chipping  is  required. 

Variation  in  Length 

4.  It  will  be  understood  by  the  shop  that  beams  or 

channels  having  no  end  connection  angles,  can 
over-run  or  under-run  }^  inch  at  each  end  unless  a 
figure  is  given  showing  the  permissible  variation. 
This  }/±  inch  is  not  to  be  indicated  on  the  drawing, 
but  if  any  less  variation  is  required,  it  should  be 
indicated. 

5.  When  beams  have  connection  angles  at  both  ends, 

the  detail  will  determine  the  permissible  variation. 

6.  When  beams  rest  on  walls,  the  wall  end  should  be 

clearly  indicated  on  drawing.  This  will  give  suffi- 
cient information  for  determining  the  variation  in 
length. 

7.  The  total  allowable  variation  at  both  ends  of  beam 

should  not  be  less  than  the  mill  variation  (that  is, 
plus  or  minus  Y%  inch  in  the  total  length),  generally 
it  should  not  be  less  than  ^  inch. 

Variations  in  Length  on  Same  Sketch 

8.  When   beams   with   small   variations   in   length   are 

combined  on  the  same  sketch,  it  will  frequently  be 
found  desirable  to  have  the  figured  and  ordered 
lengths  differ.  The  allowable  difference  will  be 
determined  by  the  detail.  See  Typical  Beam 
Sketches  in  the  Standard  for  Detailing. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     71 

DETAILING  OF  BEAMS 
Item  Numbers  on  Sketch  Sheets 

1.  Item  numbers  are  to  be  given  on  beam  sketches  only 

when  required  by  fabricating  plant. 

Beam  Girders 

2.  Beam  girders  with  separators,    if   shipped   knocked 

down,  should  be  treated  as  single  beams  and  detailed 
separately,  with  bolts  and  separators  listed  on 
separate  drawings  and  bills. 

3.  When   beam    girders    are   shipped    assembled,    they 

should  be  detailed  and  billed  as  girders  and  an 
inter-shop  order  sent  to  the  shop  covering  bolts  and 
separators.  See  page  65.3. 

Channels 

4.  The  instructions  for  detailing  beams  apply  also  to 

channels.  The  following  additional  requirements 
should  be  observed: 

5.  Though  the  working  point  of  channels  is  occasionally 

the  center  line  of  web,  it  is  advisable  to  figure  all 
floor  plans  to  the  back  of  the  channel. 

6.  Channels  should  preferably  be  detailed  looking  at  the 

back  of  same.  They  are  laid  out  in  this  position 
in  the  shop  in  order  that  the  flanges  may  engage 
the  grooves  in  the  roller  in  front  of  the  multiple 
punch. 

Tie=up  of  Main  Connections 

7.  Distance  center  to  center  of  connections,  in  addition 

to  extensions  from  the  left  end,  may  be  given 
where  desired. 

8.  Distance  center  to  center  of  connections,  in  addition 

to  extensions  from  the  left  end  must  be  given  on 
all  complicated  beams.  This  is  not  required  by  the 
shop,  but  is  necessary  in  order  to  facilitate  the 
making  and  checking  of  drawings.  All  lines  of 
figures,  such  as  rivets  in  shelf  angles  should  be  tied 
to  intermediate  connections. 


72     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

SHOP  BILLS 
General 

1.  In  general  consult  typical  drawings  for  approved 
method  of  executing  shop  bills.  The  following 
remarks  also  apply  to  combination  sketch,  shop 
and  shipping  bills  so  far  as  they  answer  the  purpose 
of  shop  bills. 


Forms  to  be  Used 

2.  For  riveted  work  attached  or  detached  shop  bills  are 

to  be  used  in  accordance  with  the  class  of  work,  as 
illustrated  in  the  typical  drawings. 

3.  For  beam   and   simple  work,   such  as  girts   or  side 

framing,  whether  detailed  on  large  or  small  sheets, 
combination  shop  and  shipping  bills  are  to  be  used 
(FormD66). 

4.  Large  drawings  with  attached  shop  bill  and  drawings 

with  separate  combination  shop  and  shipping  bill 
may  be  used  on  the  same  order. 

5.  For  numbering,  see  pages  79  to  80.4. 


Combining  and  Separating  Material 

6.  In  writing  shop  bills  all  the  material  for  members 

that  are  combined  on  the  same  sketch  should  be 
combined  on  the  shop  bill,  provided  they  are  in  the 
same  section. 

7.  On  work  divided  into  sections  or  tiers,  the  material 

for  the  members  should  be  divided  on  the  shop 
bills  into  sections  or  tiers.  When  large  attached 
shop  bills  (Form  D64)  are  used,  the  material  for 
each  tier  or  section  should  be  listed  separately. 
When  combination  shop  and  shipping  bills  are 
used,  separate  bills  should  be  used  for  each  tier  or 
section,  bearing  in  mind  that  in  office  buildings  all 
beams  and  girders  that  connect  to  the  same  length 
of  column  can  often  be  combined  on  the  same  bill. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     73 

SHOP  BILLS 
Arrangement  of  Material 

1.  On  a  shop  bill  the  main  material  should  be  billed  first 

and  all  pieces  of  main  material  of  the  same  dimen- 
sions and  for  the  same  sketch  should  be  combined 
in  the  shop  bill  unless  they  have  different  assembling 
marks.  If  several  members  in  the  same  shop  bill 
have  main  material,  of  different  lengths,  the  shop 
bill  must  state  to  which  member  each  item  of 
material  applies,  unless  bill  is  attached  to  drawing. 

2.  In   billing   detail   material   commence   at   the   lower 

or  left  end  of  member  and  complete  same  towards 
the  upper  or  right  end,  except  that  pieces  having 
the  same  assembling  mark  must  be  grouped  under 
the  same  item  in  the  shop  bill.  Rights  and  lefts 
for  assembling  marks  should  be  grouped  under 

separate  items,  or  bill  thus :  3-6  x  4  x  7/i6  x  7"<j  ^  ^  L  ( 

Itemizing 

3 .  Under  the  column  headed ' l  Ordered ' '  only  item  numbers 

and  number  of  pieces  ordered  are  to  be  given, 
unless  the  ordered  length  or  section  is  different 
from  the  length  or  section  billed,  when  it  must  be 
given  in  the  " Ordered"  column. 


Inspection  and  Paint 

4.     It  is  not  necessary  to  give  inspection  and  paint  on 
shop  bills,  except  for  certain  special  classes  of  work, 
-  such  as  forged  work  and  castings.     A  place  has 
been  provided  for  this  on  the  printed  form. 


74     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

SHIPPING  BILLS 
General 

1.  In    general,    consult    bills    of    typical    drawings    for 

approved  method  of  executing  shipping  bills. 

2.  The  following  remarks  apply  to  combination  shop  and 

shipping  bills  and  to  combination  sketch;  shop  and 
shipping  bills  so  far  as  they  answer  the  purpose  of 
shipping  bills. 

3.  Shipping  bills  must  be  properly  divided  and  paged  by 

sections.     For  numbering,  see  pages  79  to  80.5. 

4.  Separate   shipping  bills   must   be  written  for  work 

having  different  destinations. 

5.  The  calculated  weight  of  one  shipping  piece  should 

be  given  in  the  proper  column  on  pound  price  and 
export  work.  The  estimated  weight  of  castings 
should  be  given  on  all  contracts.' 

6.  For  riveted  work  the  extreme  size  of  member  in  even 

inches  should  be  given  in  the  column  headed  "Size 
of  Member."     No  other  information  is  necessary 
in  this  column.     Omit  all  sketches. 
For  note  on  last  page,  see  page  80.5. 
Export  Marks 

7.  All   special   marks   for   export   shipments,    including 

consecutive  numbers  for  each  plant  or  department 
are  to  be  given  on  page  Rl  of  shipping  bill.  No 
shipping  pieces  are  to  be  listed  on  this  sheet.  A 
print  of  page  Rl  should  be  sent  to  each  plant  or 
department  mentioned  thereon.  See  pages  126.1  to 
127.1. 
Materials  to  be  Listed 

8.  Shipping  bills  must  cover  all  work  that  is  furnished 

and  shipped  on  a  contract.  All  work  shipped  from 
a  plant  should  be  specified  in  detail.  Material 
shipped  direct  from  the  mills  or  bought  by 
Purchasing  or  Contracting  Department  or  requi- 
sitioned from  another  plant  and  shipped  direct  is 
to  be  referred  to  and  not  specified  in  detail.  The 
following  are  typical  notations  on  shipping  bills 
for  material  shipped  direct: 

"Plain  material  shipped  direct  from  mills,  mill  order 
items  10  to  100,  inclusive." 

"Corrugated  steel  by  Purchasing  Department,  mill 
order  items  1  to  100,  inclusive." 

"Windows  and  doors  by  Contracting  Department,  as 
per  drawings  SC7  and  SC8." 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     75 


SHIPPING  BILLS 
Materials  to  be  Listed — Continued 

1.  All  miscellaneous  material  which  is  furnished  by  the 
American  Bridge  Co.  must  be  listed  on  shipping 
bills.  It  must  be  clearly  indicated  by  whom 
material  is  furnished  and  to  whom  it  is  shipped. 


Material  Not  Placed  by  Steel  Erectors 

2.  If  material  such  as  shutter  eyes,  joist  anchors  for 
wood  work,  lintels  and  anchor  bolts  is  to  be  delivered 
at  site  and  put  in  place  by  any  other  than  the  steel 
erector,  it  must  be  conspicuously  noted  on  shipping 
bills  listing  those  items.  This  information  should 
also  appear  on  the  erection  plans.  See  pages  149. 2 
to  149.5. 


Inspection 

3.  Inspection  should  not  be  noted  on  shipping  bills. 

Paint 

4.  Painting  should  be  noted  on  each  page  of  the  shipping 

bill  in  one  of  the  following  ways:  " Paint,"  "No 
Paint,"  "Paint  as  per  Drawing." 

5.  Shipping  bills  are  to  specify  the  kind  and   quantity 

of  field  paint. 


76     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

ORDER  SERIES 

1.  The  series  letter  A,  B,  C,  etc.,  is  as  much  a  part  of 
the  order  number  as  the  numerals  and  should 
appear  on  drawings  and  bills. 


SUBDIVISIONS  OF  ORDERS 
Cost  Subdivision 

2.  The    plain    order    number     (without    subdivisions) 

should  appear  on  Erection  and  General  Drawings, 
while  on  all  other  drawings  and  bills  the  order 
number  should  be  followed  by  the  subdivision 
letter,  thus:  C-3700c. 

Divisions 

3.  All  portions  of  an  order  where  the  work  is  divided  in 

plan  are  to  be  known  as  divisions. 


Sections 

4.     All  portions  of  an  order  where  the  work  is  divided  in 

elevation  are  to  be  known  as  sections. 
For  numbering  drawings  by  divisions  or  sections,  see 
page  80.2. 


Extras 

5.  When  additional  material  is  ordered  under  an  "  extra, " 
the  XI,  X2,  X3,  etc.,  should  appear  as  a  part  of  the 
order  number,  thus:  B-70-X1. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     77 

Issuing  of  Prints 

1.  All  prints  must  be  clearly  stamped,  showing  purpose 

for  which  they  are  issued,  thus:  "For  File,"  "For 
Approval/7  "For  Erection."  Stamps  for  prints 
issued  for  fabrication  showing  shops  for  which  they 
are  intended,  will  be  put  on  at  the  fabricating  plant. 
All  prints  should  be  stamped  with  the  date  on  which 
they  were  made. 

Revision  of  Drawings 

2.  When   changes  have  been   made   on   drawings  that 

have  been  issued  either  to  shops  or  to  outside 
parties,  use  the  following  stamp  on  tracing.  Give 
in  the  space  provided  in  this  stamp  a  brief  descrip- 
tion of  the  change. 


REVISED 

Date 

By        C'k'd  By 

3.  In  revising  a  spliced  sheet,  place  the  stamp  on  the 

sheet  on  which  the  change  is  made. 

4.  When  revised  prints  are  to  be  sent  to  outside  parties 

or  shops,  use  either  of  the  two  following  stamps  on 
all  revised  prints,  and  underscore  the  changes  on 
the  prints  in  colored  pencil: 


REVISED  SHEET. 

DESTROY  ALL 

PREVIOUS  PRINTS. 


REVISED  PRINT. 

CHANGE  ALL  PREVIOUS 

PRINTS  TO  CORRESPOND. 


78     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

Revision  of  Drawings — Continued 


1. 


2. 


When  revision  is  of  such  a  nature  that  prints  are 
called  in  from  shops  for  the  purpose  of  making 
revision,  revisions  are  to  be  made  on  the  blue  print 
in  black  drawing  ink,  and  change  underscored  in 
colored  pencil  and  a  line  run  through  figure. 
Thus: 


,   3*. 

3* 

x^x 

5" 

-'16 

N.L.T.  2-2 

Prints  are  to  be  considered  as  being  issued  when  they 
have  been  sent  to  the  shops  for  fabrication  or  to 
outside  parties  for  use  in  setting  masonry  or 
erecting  the  work.  Changes  that  are  made  while 
the  drawings  are  being  approved  will  not  be 
considered  revisions. 


Correcting  Errors 

3.  If  in  the  progress  of  the  work  drawing  room  errors 
are  discovered,  they  should  be  corrected  on  the 
tracing,  in  order  to  avoid  repetition  if  the  work  is 
duplicated.  This  is  important. 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS     79 


DESCRIPTION  OF  FORMS  USED  FOR  DRAWINGS  AND  BILLS  AND 
SYSTEM  OF  NUMBERING  SHEETS  OR  PAGES 


Sheet  or 
Page  No. 

Use 

Description 

Size 

Form  Number 

Linen 

Bond 
Paper 

Tracing 
Paper 

1,2,  etc 
1,2,    " 
1,2,    " 

1,2,    " 
D1.2,    " 
D1.2,    " 

G1.2,    " 

XI,  2,    " 
XI,  2,    " 
SX1,2,    " 
SX1.2,    " 
F1.2.    " 
F1.2,    " 

F1.2,    " 

K1.2,    " 
F1.2,    " 
01,2,    " 

C1.2,    " 
01,2.   " 
01,2,    " 

01,2,    " 
Cl,2,    " 

Cl,2,    " 
B1.2,    " 

SI,  2,    " 
R1.2,    " 
SCI,  2,    " 

SCI,  2,    " 
EF1.2,    " 
EF1.2,    " 

EF1.2,    " 
SCI,  2,    " 

SCI,  2,    " 

SCI,  2,    " 
SCI,  2,    " 

A1.2,    " 
El,  2,    " 

PI,  2,    " 

Advance  Bill  of  Material  .  .  . 
Order  to  Change  Material.  . 
Riveted  Work  in  General.  .  . 

General  Drawings,  Layouts 
etc  
General  Drawings,  Layouts 
etc  

Advance  Bill  Form.  .  .  . 
Change  Order  Form  .  .  . 
Detail    Sheet    without 
Shop  Bill 

8^x14 
Sixll 

23fx35f 
23fx35f 
20x20 

11  x!7 
111x31 
Iljx31 
11  x!7 
11  x!7 
11  x!7 
11  x!7 

11  x!7 

11  x!7 
11  x!7 
11  x!7 

11  x!7 
11  x!7 
11  x!7 

11  x!7 
11  x!7 

11  x!7 

11  x!7 

11  x!7 

11  x!7 
11  x!7 

11  x!7 
11  x!7 
11x17 

11  x!7 
11  x!7 

23fx35f 

23fx35f 
11  x!7 

11  x!7 
11  x!7 

23fx35f 
11  x!7 

D63 
D64 

D71 
D72 
D77 

D68 
D70 
D69 
D79 
D62 

D68 
D68 

D68 

D63 

D64 
D68 

D63 
D78 

D51 
D  4 

D80 

D67 
D75 

D65 

D58 
D54 

D55 
D56 

D57 
D73 

D66 
D52 
D61 

D59 
D60 

D58 
D76 

D78b 

D80a 
D71a 
D72a 

D67a 
D75a 
D68a 

D70a 

D69a 
D65a 

D62a 
D58a 
D54a 

D55a 
D56a 

D57a 
D73a 

D66a 
D52a 
D61a 

D59a 
D68a 
D68a 

D68a 
D60a 

D68a 

D58a 
D76a 

D78a 

Detail  Sheet  with  Shop 
Bill 

Blank  Sketch  Sheet.... 

Detail  Sheet  !'.'.'. 
Form  
Blank  Sketch  Sheet.... 
Tabular  List  

Columns,  etc.  (Office  Bldgs.) 
Duplicate  Rivet  Spacing  — 
Duplicate  Pieces—  Detail  .  .  . 
'     —  Summary 

Beam  Detail  

Index  of  Shipping  Marks.  .  . 
Miscellaneous 

Blank  Sketch  Sheet.... 
Beam  Sketch  without 
conn.  Ls  
Beam  Sketch  with  conn. 
Ls  
Tabular  List 

Sketch  Sheet  with  Bill. 
Top  Sketch  Bill  Form.. 
Side      
Eye  Bar  Sketch  and  Bill 

Loop  Rod  Sketch  and 
Bill  

Detail  Shop  and  Shipping 
Bill 

Forge,  Shop  and  Shipping 

Eye  Bar,  Shop  and  Shipping 

Loop  Rod,  Shop  and  Ship- 
ping Bill  

Clevis,  Shop  and  Shipping 
Bill 

Clevis  Rod  Sketch  and 
Bill 

Pin  and  Nut,  Shop  and  Ship- 
ping Bill  .  .  . 

Pin    and  Nut,   Sketch 
and  Bill  
Shipping  Bill  Form  
Shop  and  Shipping  Bill 
Form. 

Field  Rivet  Summary  
Shop  and  Shipping  Bill  

Shop  Bill  . 

Shop  Bill  Form  
Shipping  Bill  Form  
Flat  and  Corrugated 
Sheet  List  

Shipping  Bill... 

Sheet  Steel  Bill 

"        "    Miscellaneous... 
Work  Done  in  Field  
Erection    Plan   and    Crane 
Clearance  

Blank  Sketch  Sheet.... 
Tabular  List.  .. 

Erector's  List  of  Field  Rivets 
Sub-contract  Material  

Sketch  Shop  and  Shipping 

Detail    Sheet    without 
Shop  Bill  

Detail  Sheet  with  Shop 
Bill  

Blank  Sketch  Sheet.... 

Side  Sketch  Bill  Form.. 
Tabular  List  
Detail    Sheet    without 
Shop  Bill  

Schedule  

Erection  Plans  
Inter-shop  Order.  .  . 

Form... 

8O     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

Numbering  Drawings  and  Bills 

1.  Shop  and  shipping  bills  (Form  D66)   and  shop  bills 

(Form  D52)  when  used  for  large  drawings  should 
be  numbered  consecutively  for  the  order  or  section, 
but  one  bill  page  should  not  apply  to  more  than 
one  large  drawing,  except  in  the  case  of  drawings 
which  are  noted  to  be  worked  together.  On  the 
detail  drawing  should  appear  the  page  numbers  of 
bills  covering  the  same. 

2.  When  an  order  is  divided  into  sections  or  divisions, 

or  assigned  to  two  or  more  plants,  advance  bills, 
detail  drawings,  shop  and  shipping  bills  should  be 
numbered  in  separate  series  for  each  section  or 
division  or  plant  assignment: — thus,  101,  102,  103, 
etc.,  for  the  first  section;  201,  202,  203,  etc.,  for 
the  second  section,  etc.  For  definition  of  division 
and  section,  see  pages  76.3  and  76.4. 

3.  Drawings  covering  material  in  more  than  one  section 

should  be  numbered  with  the  section  in  which  the 
material  first  occurs. 

4.  For  large  office  buildings  this  same  system  of  number- 

ing drawings  and  bills  should  be  used,  considering 
each  tier  of  columns,  with  its  connecting  beams  and 
girders,  as  one  section. 

5.  On  contracts  where  no  complete  schedule  of  drawings 

and  bills  is  made  on  an  "A"  sheet,  the  last  page  of 
the  shipping  bill  (either  Form  D61  or  D66) 
should  be  noted  thus:  "This  page  together  with 
bills  Cl  and  2  and  Bl  to  5,  inclusive,  completes 
shipping  bills  for  the  order  (or  section)." 


PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS      81 

Abbreviations 

The  following  list  of  abbreviations  and  symbols 
comprises  those  which  occur  most  frequently  on 
detail  drawings.  If  the  draftsman  has  occasion  to 
abbreviate  any  of  these  terms,  the  abbreviation 
should  agree  with  this  list.  Discretion  should  be 
used  in  determining  when  to  abbreviate  and  when 
to  spell  out  words  and  phrases.  Clearness  should 
never  be  sacrificed  for  brevity.  In  general, 
abbreviations  should  not  be  used  on  drawings 
intended  for  use  elsewhere  than  in  our  own  plants. 
They  should  not  be  used  generally  on  Export 
Work.  See  pages  124.5,  124.8  and  125.3. 

G.  C.  S Galvanized  Corrugated  Siding. 

G.  C.  R Galvanized  Corrugated  Roofing. 

G.  Fl Galvanized  Flashing. 

G.  Lou Galvanized  Louvres. 

G.  Lou.  Br Galvanized  Louvre  Brackets. 

B.  C.  S Black  Corrugated  Siding. 

B.  C.  R Black  Corrugated  Roofing. 

B.  Fl Black  Flashing. 

B.  of  R Base  of  Rail. 

Elev Elevation. 

Max Maximum. 

Min Minimum. 

Std Standard. 

c.  of Center  of. 

c.  c Centre  to  Center. 

b.  b Back  to  Back. 

p.  p Point  to  Point. 

o.o Out  to  Out. 

dia Diameter. 

alt. Alternate. 

spa Spacing  or  Spaces. 

abt About. 

:.       bet Between. 

csk Countersunk. 

I       Beams. 

L-I     Channels. 

L      Angles. 

H      Carnegie  H-Sections. 

cov Cover  Plates. 

pi Plates. 

fil..  .Fillers. 


82     PREPARATION  DETAIL  DRAWINGS  SHOP  &  SHIPPING  BILLS 

Abbreviations — Continued 

stif Stiffeners. 

fig Flange. 

lat Lattice. 

diaph Diaphragm. 

bot Bottom. 

Exp Expansion. 

COL. Columns. 

GIR..... Girders. 

TR Trusses. 

DIAG Diagonals. 

K.  Br Knee  Braces. 

G.  P Gas  Pipe. 

FLB Floor  Beams. 

CHD Chords. 

FIN Finished. 

SYM Symmetrical. 

P.  B Permanent  Bolts. 

S.  B Shop  Bolts  (bolts  for  shipment). 

C.  S ...Cast  Steel. 

C.I Cast  Iron. 

F.  S Far  Side. 

N.  S Near  Side. 

Sep Separators. 

C.  L. .  .  .Center  Line. 


ASSEMBLING    MARKS  83 


CHAPTER  VI 
ASSEMBLING  MARKS 

General 

1.  All  detail  material  shown  on  shop  drawings  except 

standard  connection  angles  for  beams,  should  be 
identified  by  assembling  marks.  (Consult  typical 
drawings  for  distinction  between  main  and  detail 
material.)  There  are  two  systems  for  this  marking: 
the  "X  Duplicate  System"  and  the  " Ordinary 
System." 

X  Duplicate  System 

2.  On  contracts  of  considerable  size  and  when  there  is 

sufficient  repetition  of  details  throughout,  an  X 
detail  sheet  of  repeating  pieces  should  be  made. 
Each  piece  so  detailed  should  be  given  a  distinctive 
mark  consisting  of  a  characteristic  letter  and  a 
numeral  followed  by  the  letter  X,  thus:  b2x,  k4x, 
etc.  When  rights  and  lefts  are  required,  the  letters 
R  and  L  shall  follow  the  mark,  thus:  b2xR,  k4xL, 
etc. 

3.  The  word  " Standard"  is  to  be  applied  to  nothing 

except  standards  authorized  as  such  for  all  plants 
and  to  such  fabricated  material  as  is  covered  by 
them.  (See  Standards  for  Detailing.)  If  any  of 
these  pieces  are  used  on  a  contract,  they  should  be 
detailed  on  the  X  detail  sheet  with  the  rest  of  the 
duplicate  pieces. 

4.  For  all  X  Duplicate  pieces  on  a  contract,  a  summary 

should  be  made  on  an  SX  sheet  giving  the  number 
of  pieces,  their  mark,  size,  length,  the  number  of  the 
X  detail  sheet  and  the  item  number  or  stock 
notation  of  the  material  reserved  for  these  pieces. 

5.  On  the  shop  bill  the  item  number  or  stock  notation 

should    not    appear.     Diagonal    lines    should    be 


drawn  thus  opposite  the  listed    piece 


in  the  item  column.  This  will  indicate  that  the 
item  number  or  stock  notation  is  given  on  the 
summary  (SX  sheet). 


84  ASSEMBLING    MARKS 

X  Duplicate  System — Continued 

1.  The  following  letters  are  to  be  considered  characteristic 

for  various  pieces: 

a       For  all  angles  not  excepted  hereinafter. 

b       For  seat  angles  used  to  support  beams  or 

girders  that  connect  to  girders  or  columns. 
c       For  cap  plates,  base  plates  and  splice  plates 

on  office  building  columns. 
d        For  fillers  with  two  or  more  lines  of  holes. 
f        For  fillers  with  single  line  of  holes. 
h       For  bent  angles  or  plates. 
k       For  stiffener  angles  or  plates  fitted  at  one 

end  only,  such  as  angles  under  beam  seats 

or  stiffener  angles  at  column  bases. 
p       For  all  plates  not  excepted  elsewhere, 
s        For  stiffener  angles  fitted  at  both  ends. 
t        For    top  angles  tying  beams  or  girders  to 

girders  or  columns. 
w       For  web  members  and  bracing. 
y        For  lattice  bars. 

2.  Pieces  having  the  same  characteristic  letter  should 

be  grouped  on  the  summary  (SX  sheet). 


Ordinary  System 

3.  For  contracts  on  which  for  any  reason  the  "X  Dupli- 

cate System"  of  assembling  marks  is  not  used  and 
on  every  contract  for  those  pieces  not  covered  by 
that  system,  each  different  piece  of  detail  material 
should  have  a  distinctive  mark  consisting  of  two 
small  letters  followed  by  a  numeral.  The  first 
letter  should  be  characteristic  the  same  as  in  the 
X  Duplicate  System;  the  second  letter  may  be  any 
one  of  the  following:  a,  b,  c,  d,  f,  g,  h,  k,  m,  n,  p, 
t,  v,  w,  y;  the  numeral  should  be  the  same  as  the 
number  of  the  sheet  upon  which  the  piece  is  detailed. 
This  numeral  (although  an  essential  part  of  the 
assembling  mark)  does  not  appear  on  the  drawing 
where  the  piece  is  detailed  unless  the  piece  repeats 
on  some  other  sheet. 

4.  The  complete  mark  should  appear  on  the  templet  and 

on  the  metal. 


ASSEMBLING    MARKS  86 

Ordinary  System— Continued 

1.  Pieces  which  repeat  on  more  than  one  sheet  carry  the 

mark  (with  the  sheet  number)  given  them  on  the 
sheet  where  first  detailed.  For  example,  an  angle 
detailed  on  sheet  5  may  be  marked  "af;"  if  the 
angle  does  not  repeat  on  any  other  sheet,  the  mark 
"af  "  should  be  written  after  the  billed  size  of  the 
angle,  but  if  the  angle  repeats  on  one  or  more  sheets 
the  complete  mark  "af5"  should  appear  where  it 
is  detailed  and  at  each  subsequent  appearance  on 
the  sheets  where  it  is  repeated.  (See  page  59.1.) 
The  angle  should  be  detailed  only  once;  each 
repetition  should  be  drawn  in  outline  without 
dimensions  and  marked  "af5".  The  size  of  the 
angle  should  be  billed  once  on  each  sheet  on  which 
it  occurs.  When  rights  and  lefts  are  required,  the 
letters  R  and  L  should  follow  the  mark,  thus: 
af5R,  af5L.  The  drawing  should  clearly  show 
which  is  R  and  which  is  L. 

2.  If  a  piece  is  detailed  on  an  F,  G,  or  C  sheet,  the  form 

letter  becomes  a  part  of  the  mark,  as  abF4  or 
kgG16R. 

3.  When  there  are  more  pieces  of  one  general  class  on 

a  sheet  than  there  are  available  letters  in  the 
alphabet,  a  third  letter  may  be  introduced:  thus, 
after  having  used  the  mark  "ay3"  continue  with 
aba3,  abb3,  abc3  to  aby3. 

4.  A  summary  of  the  pieces  which  repeat  should  be  made 

(on  an  SX  sheet)  exactly  the  same  as  for  the  X 
Duplicate  System,  giving  the  number  of  the  sheet 
upon  which  each  piece  is  detailed. 

Roof  Trusses 

5.  The  chords  and  web  members  of  large  roof  trusses 

need  not  be  given  assembling  marks.  A  capital 
letter  should  be  placed  on  the  drawing  at  each 
panel  point  and  pieces  will  then  be  known  by  the 
letters  at  their  extremities.  For  detailed  explana- 
tion of  this  method,  see  pages  88  to  90. 

6.  For  small  roof  trusses,   lattice   girders  and  bracing, 

the  usual  assembling  'marks  may  be  used  for  web 
members  and  details,  the  main  material  not  requir- 
ing any  marks. 


86  ASSEMBLING    MARKS 

Trough  Floor 

1.  Main  material  for  trough  floor  or  similar  work  occur- 

ring   in    large    quantities    with    slight    differences 
should  be  identified  by  assembling  marks. 

Paired  Stiffeners 

2.  All  paired  girder  stiff eners  are  to  be  marked  right 

and  left  even  though  the  detail  indicates  them  to 
be  the  same. 


ERECTION   AND   SHIPPING    MARKS  87 


CHAPTER  VII 

ERECTION  AND  SHIPPING  MARKS 

Building  Work 

1.  Standard  Castings,  small .' A 

Floor  Beams  and  Channels  (see  below) B 

Bearing  Plates  and  Slabs BP 

Columns  and  Posts  (see  below) C 

Cast  Bases CB 

Diagonals  and  Laterals  (except  rods) D 

Framing,  Walls,  Partitions,  Ceiling,  etc F 

Floor  Plates FP 

Girders G 

Hoppers,  Bins,  Chutes,  etc H 

Knee  Braces K 

Lintels L 

Miscellaneous  Connections M 

Miscellaneous  Castings N 

Purlins P 

Rafters R 

Struts. S 

Rail  Splice  Bars.  .".  V.^j: ; !*.:^.  ~. . !'. /.. SB 

Smoke  Stacks SF 

Trusses T 

Wall  Plates WP 

Rods  (Bracing) X 

Truss  Members  (see  pages  88  to  90). 

2.  These  marks  are  intended  to  cover  the  general  run  of 

building  work  only,  and  in  all  cases  are  to  be  followed 
by  numerals,  for  example,  Gl,  G2,  G4  L,  Rl,  R2, 
R4  R,  R4  L,  etc. 

3.  For  beams,  channels  and  columns  in  office  building 

work,  no  letter  is  necessary,  the  number  and  floor 
or  tier  being  sufficient  identification.  For  example, 
mark  beams  "No.  40,  1st  Floor ;"  mark  columns 
"Col.  10— (3-5)." 

4.  In  general,  no  marks  are  given  to  tie-rods  or  sag-rods. 

If  desired  the  marks  for  wall  plates  may  be  omitted. 
In  such  case  the  size  used  should  be  noted  on  erection 
plan,  under  each  particular  size  of  beam. 


88 


ERECTION   AND   SHIPPING    MARKS 


Building  Work — Continued 

o 


1. 


2. 


3. 


TRUSSES  SHIPPED  IN  HALVES 

TRUSS  MARK 


Position 
of  Member 

Tl 

T2 

T3 

T4 

T5 

AEG 

AG1R 

AG2R 

AG3R 

AG3L 

AG4R 

XEG 

XG1L 

XG2L 

XG3L 

XG3R 

XG4L 

EK 

EK1 

EK2 

EK2 

EK2 

EK2 

GG 

GG1 

GG2 

GG3 

GG3 

GG2 

LO 

LO1 

LO1 

LO1 

LD 

i  --V  '  ; 

LD1 

LD2 

LD2 

LE 

LEI 

LEI 

LEI 

OE 

OE1 

OE2 

OE2 

TRUSS  MARK 

T6 

T7 

T8 

T9 

T10 

AEG 

AG4L 

AG3R 

AG3L 

AG2L 

AGIL 

XEG 

XG4R 

XG3L 

XG3R 

XG2R 

XG1R 

EK 

EK2 

EK2 

EK2 

EK2 

EK1 

GG 

GG2 

GG3 

GG3 

GG2 

GG1 

•LO 

LO1 

LO1 

LO1 

LD 

LD2 

LD2 

LD1 

LE 

LEI 

LEI 

LEI 

OE 

OE2 

OE2 

OE1 

ERECTION   AND  SHIPPING    MARKS 

Building  Work — Continued 

TRUSSES   SHIPPED   KNOCKED   DOWN 

TRUSS  MARK 


89 


Position 
of  Member 

Tl 

T2 

T3 

T4 

T5 

AE 

AE1 

AE2 

AE3 

AE3 

AE4 

XE 

XE1 

XE2 

XE3 

XE3 

XE4 

AG 

AG1R 

AG2R 

AG3R 

AG3L 

AG2L 

XG 

XG1L 

XG2L 

XG3L 

XG3R 

XG2R 

GG 

GG1 

GG2 

GG3 

GG3 

GG2 

EK 

EK1 

EK2 

EK2 

EK2 

EK2 

BH  ' 

BH1 

BH1 

BH1 

BH1 

BH1 

CG 

CGI 

CG2 

CG2 

CG2 

CG2 

DF 

DF1 

DF1 

DF1 

DF1 

DF1 

CH 

CHI 

CHI 

CHI 

CHI 

CHI 

CF 

CF1 

CF1 

CF1 

CF1 

CF1 

EG 

EG1 

EG2 

EG2 

EG2 

EG2 

LD 

LD1 

LD2 

LD2 

LO 

LO1 

L01 

LO1 

LE 

LEI 

LEI 

LEI 

OE 

OE1 

OE2 

OE2 

TRUSS  MARK 

T6 

T7 

T8 

T9 

T10 

AE 

AE4 

AE3 

AE3 

AE2 

AE1 

XE 

XE4 

XE3 

XE3 

XE2 

XE1 

AG 

AG2R 

AG3R 

AG3L 

AG2L 

AG1L 

XG 

XG2L 

XG3L 

XG3R 

XG2R 

XG1R 

GG 

GG2 

GG3 

GG3 

GG2 

GG1 

EK 

EK2 

EK2 

EK2 

EK2 

EK1 

BH 

BH1 

BH1 

BH1 

BH1 

BH1 

CG 

CG2 

CG2 

CG2 

CG2 

CGI 

DF 

DF1 

DF1 

DF1 

DF1 

DF1 

CH 

CHI 

CHI 

CHI 

CHI 

CHI 

CF 

CF1 

CF1 

CF1 

CF1 

CF1 

EG 

EG2 

EG2 

EG2 

EG2 

EG1 

LD 

LD2 

LD2 

LD1 

LQ 

LO1 

LO1 

LO1 

LE 

LEI 

LEI 

LEI 

OE 

OE2 

OE2 

OE1 

9O  ERECTION   AND   SHIPPING    MARKS 

Building  Work — Continued 

1.  Roof  trusses  should  be  marked  as  indicated  by   figs. 

88.1  and  88.2,  tables  Nos.  88.3  and  89.1,  and  as 
outlined  below: 

2.  Shipping  marks  for  parts  of  roof  trusses,  large  lattice 

girders,  etc.,  should  consist  of  two  capital  letters 
and  a  numeral.  The  letters  used  should  be  those 
at  the  extremities  of  the  piece,  except  as  noted 
below.  The  numerals  used  should  run  consecu- 
tively from  1  up;  as  BH  1,  BH  2,  CG  1,  CG  2,  etc. 
When  trusses  are  shipped  in  halves,  the  riveted 
up  portion,  or  "half  truss/'  will  be  marked  AG  1, 
XG  1,  etc.,  using  the  letters  at  the  extremities  of 
the  bottom  chord  section,  and  the  balance  of  the 
pieces  by  the  letters  at  their  extremities,  followed 
by  a  numeral. 

3.  The  X  end  of  all  trusses  must  be  at  the  same  side 

of  the  building. 

4.  A  table  and  diagrams  should  be  placed  on  the  truss 

detail  sheet  in  accordance  with  table  No.  88.3  and 
figs.  88.1  and  88.2,  if  shipped  in  half  trusses  or 
riveted  complete;  and  in  accordance  with  table 
No.  89.1  and  figs.  88.1  and  88.2  when  shipped 
"knocked  down"  or  in  less  than  half  trusses. 

5.  The  truss  marks  are  to  be  recorded  in  a  horizontal 

line  at  the  top  of  the  table  and  the  letters  indicating 
the  position  of  the  members  in  the  truss,  as  shown 
by  the  diagram,  are  to  be  noted  in  a  vertical  column 
at  the  left  of  the  table.  In  the  body  of  the  table, 
the  piece  marks  are  to  be  entered  as  shown  in 
tables  Nos.  88.3  and  89.1. 


ERECTION   AND  SHIPPING    MARKS  91 

Bridge  Work 

1.  For  truss  bridges  mark  panel  points  on  top  chord 

"Ul,"  "U2,"  etc.;  mark  panel  points  on  lower 
chord  ULO,"  "LI,"  "L2,"  etc.  Mark  all  pieces 
with  letters  of  panel  points  between  which  they 
occur,  except  that  end  posts  are  to  be  marked 
"EP."  The  pieces  in  the  left  half  of  the  far  truss 
are  to  be  considered  as  rights;  the  other  pieces  are 
to  be  marked  rights  and  lefts,  accordingly. 

Sidewalk  and  other  Brackets B 

Bottom  Struts BS 

Buckle  Plates .BP 

Columns  and  Posts  (not  in  trusses) C 

Cross  Frames CF 

Stringer  Laterals D 

Shoe  Struts .  .ES 

Floor  Beams F 

Fixed  Shoes FS 

Bed  Plates— Fixed  End FP 

Main  Girders ,  V..^^^.  •  -G 

Knee  Braces K 

Bottom  Laterals L 

Longitudinal  Bracing  (except  rods) LB 

Longitudinal  Struts LS 

Miscellaneous  Angles M 

Miscellaneous  Plates P 

Portals PS 

Expansion  Shoes RS 

Bed  Plates— Exp.  End RP 

Roller  Nests \foi .(; . RN 

Stringers S 

Sub  Struts  (for  sway  bracing),  in  spans. .  .  ..SS 

Sway  Bracing  (not  rods),  in  spans SB 

Top  Laterals. T 

Top  Struts ..,. TS 

Transverse  Struts,  in  bents TS  or  WS 

Transverse  Bracing  (except  rods) TB 

Pins Panel  Point  Letter 

Special  Work 

2.  The  marking  to  be  used  for  special  classes  of  work 

is  left  to  the  judgment  of  the  Plant  Engineer.  The 
general  scheme  outlined  above  is  to  be  used  as  far 
as  practicable. 


92  ERECTION   AND  SHIPPING    MARKS 


MATCH  MARKING 

Trusses 

1.  All  points  to  be  match  marked  should  be  numbered 

consecutively  for  each  truss,  as  shown  in  fig.  93.1 
The  consecutive  numbering  of  points  opposite  one 
another  on  the  same  span  should  be  the  same. 

2.  A  prefix  capital  letter  should  be  used  in  the  mark  to 

indicate  the  truss  to  which  the  members  belong: 
thus,  "A"  for  the  first  truss,  UB"  for  the  second 
truss/  "C"  for  the  third  truss,  etc.  This  will 
facilitate  the  sorting  of  the  material  in  the  field. 
In  addition  to  the  match  mark,  all  main  members 
are  to  be  noted  Truss  A,  etc.,  indicating  further 
to  which  truss  they  belong. 

3.  Members  and   detail  pieces  which  are  symmetrical 

and  can  be  reversed  in  position  should  have  ends 
match  marked  with  the  last  letters  of  the  alphabet 
(w,  x,  y,  z),  as  shown  in  fig.  93.2.  These 
letters  should  be  different  for  far  side  and  near  side 
of  the  same  truss:  thus,  "x"  for  near  side  and 
"w"  for  far  side. 

4.  If  the  use  of  steel  stamps  is  required,  their  imprint 

should  be  adjacent  to  the  paint  marks. 

5.  No  match  marking  is  to  be  shown  on  original  shop 

drawings.  When  it  is  decided  that  a  job  is  to  be 
match  marked,  suitable  diagrams  should  'be  pre- 
pared, the  marks  recorded,  and  the  necessary 
number  of,  copies  sent  to  the  erector  at  once. 

6.  This  same  system  may  be  applied  to  girders,  trestle 

bents,  etc. 


ERECTION   AND   SHIPPING    MARKS 

MATCH  MARKING 
Trusses — Continued 


TRUSS  "A1 
INSIDE  VIEW 


1. 


Al       A16       A15       A14      A13       A12      All 
FAR  TRUSS  INSIDE  VIEW 


A10 


TRUSS  "B" 
INSIDE  VIEW 


B9      BIO       Bll        B12       B13      B14       B15 
NEAR  TRUSS  INSIDE  VIEW 


,  A4 


B16 


2. 


ii "i  i!  A4  l!   A4  J 

jEte&sJfc: 


Vy  "  i  '!  VV 

0  &  <^ 


TRUSS  "A" 

Ui     -^      CO      <M     --1 


x\^  1!  ^  ll  V^if 

TRUSS  "A"  POINT  "4" 
TRUSS  "C" 


TRUSS  "E" 


3. 


TRUSS  "D* 


TRUSS  "F" 

K" 1        f*1        H-t       H-l       M         P-|»— II— 11-^ 

TRUSS  "B" 

Tanks 

4.  At  splice  points  when  there  is  continuous  equal  rivet 

spacing,    a    point    common   to   the   two    adjacent 
surfaces  should  be  clearly  indicated. 

5.  When  there  are  duplicate  tanks,  match  marks  for  the 

first  tank  should  be  prefixed  by  the  letter  "A"  and 
for  the  second  tank  by  the  letter  "B",  etc. 

All   marks   should   be   inside   the   tank   if    possible. 

If  the  use  of  steel  stamps  is  required,  their  imprint 
should  be  adjacent  to  the  paint  marks. 

No  match  marking  should  be  shown  on  original  shop 
drawings.  When  it  is  decided  that  a  job  is  to  be 
match  marked,  suitable  diagrams  should  be  pre- 
pared, the  marks  recorded,  and  the  necessary 
number  of  copies  sent  to  the  erector  at  once. 
See  figs.  94.1  and  94.2 


94  ERECTION   AND   SHIPPING    MARKS 

MATCH   MARKING 
Tanks— Continued 


'*     8 

lU                         .81  eo                         .§ 

.1 

eo 

"3 

CQ 

>•   <?         "?. 

^        MIR       w|            MIL      ^             M2        ^ 

S        M2       1 

S 

*^J 

SUb 
»  s  ^ 

0    Ul    C 

29 

Yl 

25                            26 

-L 

2G 

30 

Yl 

26                          27, 

1 

I 
I 

31 

Yl 

27                          28 

28       " 

; 

_          2525 

25 

26 

! 

27 

28 

^       > 

Y2 

Y2 

! 

Y2 

Y2 

u  .  -• 

1^4 

212 

121 

22 

,•',• 

22 

232 

3  23 

24  !i 

4 

? 

•2 

1 

1 

'       "22 

1 

2 

3 

2 

1 

V 

Y3 

17                            18 

i 

Y3 

18                         19 

Y3 

19                          20 

M 

Y3 

20                      17  7 

17 

18 

19 

20 

.'L.    •.   -.**. 

Y4 

Y4 

Y4 

Y4 

Ul 

16 

13  L 

313 

14 

14 

14 

151 

5  15                      16  1 

| 

13 

| 

14 

15 

i 

16 

,--  —  > 

Y5 

Y5 

1 

Y5 

1 

Y5 

/•x 

12             8                9 

y 

9            5            10 

''u 

10            6           11 

u 

11            7 

12 

M5L 
v  Side  plates  shown  developed. 


M5R 


M5L 


M5R 


2.        M4  Splice 


M4  Splice 


1. 

2. 

3. 
4. 
5. 


ERECTION   AND  SHIPPING    MARKS  95 

MATCH  MARKING 
Spacing  Rings  for  Draw  Bridges 

All  points  to  be  match  marked  should  be  numbered 
consecutively  as  shown  in  fig.  95.6. 

When  there  are  several  similar  detail  pieces  (such  as 
the  splice  plates  shown  in  fig.  95.7)  at  a  point 
and  in  different  planes,  they  should  be  distinguished 
by  using  the  last  letters  of  the  alphabet  (w,  x,  y,  z) 
in  the  match  mark. 

Shaft  bearings  (with  caps)  and  other  machinery  parts 
should  be  match  marked  by  numbers. 

If  the  use  of  steel  stamps  is  required,  their  imprint 
should  be  adjacent  to  the  paint  marks. 

Match  marking  on  this  class  of  work  may  be  noted 
on  the  original  shop  drawings. 


W-^W^  2 


96  POINTS  TO    BE  OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING 

CHAPTER  VIII 

POINTS  TO  BE  OBSERVED  IN  DETAILING 
TO  SIMPLIFY  FABRICATION 

Consult  Plant  Equipment 

1 .  Special  attention  should  be  given  to  the  equipment  of 

fabricating;  plants  in  order  that  the  work  may  be 
detailed  in  accordance  with  their  requirements. 
Important  items  of  equipment  to  be  considered 
are: 

Requirements  of  multiple  punch. 

Capacity  of  shears. 

Capacity  of  milling  heads. 

Capacity  of  edge  planers. 

Capacity  and  allowable  heights  for  surface  planers. 

Capacity  of  boring  mills. 

Capacity  of  rivet  machines  for  inside  lattice  work. 

Capacity  of  coping  machines. 

Capacity  of  cranes. 

Formers  on  hand  for  bending. 

2.  Consider  the  width  of  jaw  of  plate  punches.     Rivets 

placed  in  the  center  of  web  plates  often  require 
holes  to  be  drilled,  when,  if  shifted  two  or  three 
inches  either  side,  they  could  be  punched. 

3.  Consult  plant  equipment  for  extreme  sizes  of  pieces. 

Combining  Templets 

4.  In  combining  columns  or  girders  having  small  varia- 

tions in  length,  make  the  variable  space  as  near  the 
end  as  possible.  Do  not  throw  it  into  the  detail 
when  it  can  be  taken  care  of  in  gauge  of  end  angles. 
The  requirements  of  some  multiple  punches 
modify  this  instruction. 

.5.  Cover  plate  faces  should  always  be  marked  "A"  and 
"C"  and  web  faces  UB"  and  "D".  In  order  to 
reduce  the  marking  of  templets  to  a  minimum, 
they  should  be  marked  with  the  same  letters 
throughout  an  order. 


POINTS   TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING  97 

TO  SIMPLIFY  FABRICATION 

Multiple  Plate  Punch 

1.  The  punching  for  all  webs  and  cover  plates  of  girders 

and  columns  should  be  arranged  to  meet  the  require- 
ments of  the  multiple  punches  in  the  shop  where 
the  work  is  to  be  fabricated,  bearing  in  mind  that 
a  change  in  assignment  is  sometimes  made  after  a 
contract  is  well  advanced.' 

2.  In  through  plate  girders  for  railroad  bridges,  the  sub- 

punching  of  floor  beam  connection  is  not  a  sufficient 
reason  for  neglecting  to  arrange  the  webs  for  the 
multiple  punch. 

3.  No  rule   can  be  made   determining  the  amount   of 

duplication  necessary  to  warrant  using  the  multiple 
punch  as  the  condition  of  work  in  the  shop  has 
much  to  do  with  the  case. 

Riveting 

4.  For  plate  girders  and  I-shaped  columns,  use  only  two 

lines  of  rivets  in  cover  plates  when  the  following 
conditions  can  be  maintained: 

Distance  A — Not  greater  than 
thirty-two  times  the  thickness  of  the 
thinnest  plate. 

Distance  B — Not  greater  than  eight 
times  the  thickness  of  the  thinnest 
plate. 

Whenever  allowable  use  only  two 
lines  of  rivets  in  the  webs  of  columns. 
Variations  from  the  above  ruie  are  to 

be  ignored  when  they  amount  to  the  fractional  part 

of  an  inch. 

5.  Unless  prohibited  by  the  customer,  the  above  applies 

to  railroad  girders  as  well  as  building  girders. 

6.  Rivets    fastening    skew    back    angles    to    beams    or 
-  girders,    except   for   heavy   loading,    need    not   be 

spaced  closer  than  12  inches. 

7.  Rivets   fastening   together   the   angles   composing   a 

double  angle  strut  when  washers  are  used  between 
the  angles  need  not  be  spaced  closer  than  2  ft.  6  in. 

8.  Rivets  fastening  together  the  angles  of  double  angle 

tension  members  when  washers  are  used  between 
the  angles  need  not  be  spaced  closer  than  3  feet. 

9.  When  angles  are  in  contact,  no  washers  being  used, 

space  rivets  12  to  18  inches,  depending  on  the 
thickness  of  the  angle. 


98  POINTS   TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING 

TO  SIMPLIFY  FABRICATION 
Riveting — Continued 

1.  <_ _,     1.    Rivets  connecting  horizontal  channels 

to  crane  beams  should  be  spaced  3  inch 
centers  at  the  end  for  three  or  four  spaces. 
The  remaining  rivets  should  be  spaced 
18  inch  centers.  On  export  work  the 
channels  should  be  shipped  loose. 

c- ^a 

2.  Double     stiffeners     should     have     outstanding    legs 

riveted  together  only  when  carrying  heavy  loads 
or  when  work  is  exposed.  In  such  cases  space 
rivets  12  inches  center  to  center.  When  permis- 
sible move  stiffeners  so  that  there  will  be  not  less 
than  2  inches  between  backs  and  thus  avoid  the 
necessity  of  riveting  them  together. 

3.  Avoid  unnecessary  countersunk  and  chipped  rivets 

in  fastening  cap  plates  and  base  plates  to  columns, 
and  base  plates  to  girders  and  pedestals — such 
rivets  are  expensive.  It  is  not  necessary  to  space 
these  rivets  closer  than  6  inches.  Single  gauge 
should  be  used  in  6  inch  legs  of  angles. 

4.  Avoid  unnecessary  rivets  in  fastening  together  the 

component  parts  of  girders  and  columns. 

5.  Double  web  plates  of  chord  sections  should  be  held 

.together  by  stitch  rivets  spaced  about  12  inches 
center  to  center. 

6.  On  floor  plates,  rivets  should  be  spaced  from  8  inch 

to  12  inch  centers,  depending  upon  the  conditions 
under  which  the  plates  are  used. 

7.  The  diagonals  of  a  cross  frame  should  be  connected 


at  the  center  by  a  plate,  thus : 


8,  When  small  clips  are  used,  three  rivets  instead  of  two 

should   be   used   to   prevent   turning   while   being 
riveted. 

9.  Except  for  the  purpose  of  simplifying  shop  work,  do 

not  use  a  detail  that  requires  a  rivet  to  be  counter- 
sunk   and    chipped    before    work    is    completely 
-  assembled  and  riveted. 


POINTS   TO    BE  OBSERVED   IN    DETAILING  99 

TO  SIMPLIFY  FABRICATION 
Bolting 

1.  On   mill   buildings   when   purlins   are   bolted,    purlin 

clips  and  rod  connections  should  also  be  bolted. 
The  riveting  of  these  clips  requires  another  operation 
which  should  be  avoided. 

2.  If  bottom  chord  bracing  is  connected  by  permanent 

bolts,  the  connection  plates  should  be  bolted  to 
truss  or  shipped  loose.  If  the  bracing  is  to  be 
field  riveted,  the  method  of  handling  the  connection 
plates  should  conform  to  good  practice  and  economy. 

3.  On   export   work   such    clips   and   plates   should   be 

shipped  loose. 

4.  On  light  work,  such  as  cornice  brackets,  pent  houses, 

ceiling  framing,  etc.,  use  bolts  in  place  of  shop 
rivets,  if  requirements  of  work  will  permit. 

5.  When  finished  appearance  is  to  be  considered,  it  is 

often  desirable  to  have  bolt  heads  placed  on  the 
exposed  side,  when  this  is  the  case  a  conspicuous 
note  to  this  effect  should  be  placed  on  the  Erection 
Plan. 

Avoid  Stiffeners 

6.  Avoid  the  use  of  fitted  stiffeners  at  column  bases  and 

column  caps.  When  necessary  to  use  stiffeners, 
arrange  details,  if  possible,  so  that  stiffeners  are 
finished  with  the  column. 

7.  Avoid  the  use  of  stiffeners  on  columns  under  crane 

girders  and  beams  when  they  rest  on  top  of  recessed 
crane  columns.  These  columns  are  usually  finished 
(except  the  webs)  and  except  for  very  heavy  loads 
sufficient  bearing  area  can  be  obtained  directly  on 
the  finished  end  of  the  column.  If  the  column 
load  requires  additional  bearing  area,  add  a  plate 
to  the  column  which  will  be  finished  with  the 
main  section. 

8.  -For   crane  beams  .resting   on    brackets,    do  not  use 

stiffeners  on  brackets  unless  reaction  on  one  side 
exceeds  16,000  pounds  or  sufficient  rivets  cannot 
be  obtained  in  seat  to  take  load.  Use  J/2  inch  seat 
angles  for  loads  over  12,000  pounds  and  %  inch  for 
loads  12,000  pounds  and  less. 

9.  For  beams  resting  on  seats,  avoid  the  use  of  stiffeners 

whenever  possible.  In  many  cases  this  may  be 
done  by  increasing  the  thickness  of  the  seat  angle. 


1OO  POINTS   TO    BE   OBSERVED    IN    DETAILING 

"    TO  SIMPLIFY  FABRICATION 

Seat  Angles 

1.  For  loads  of  12,000  Ibs.  and  less,  a  Y%  inch  seat  angle 

without  stiff eners  should  be  used. 

2.  For  loads  of  12,000  to  16,000  Ibs.,  a  ^  inch  seat  angle 

without  stiff eners  should  be  used. 

3.  For  loads  of  16,000  to  25,000  Ibs.,  a  ^  inch  seat  angle 

without  stiffeners  should  be  used. 

4.  When  a  small  beam  frames  into  the  web  of  a  large 

beam,  use  a  seat  angle  and  side  clip  angle  connecting 
the  beam  to  the  side  clip  angle  with  one  rivet. 

Avoid  Finishing 

5.  Columns  and  struts  having  loads  of  40,000  Ibs.  or  less 

should  not  be  finished.  Provide  sufficient  rivets 
to  take  entire  load. 

Girder  Depth 

6.  Unless   otherwise   specified   make   distance   back   to 

back  of  angles  for  plate  girders  J/£"  greater  than  the 
width  of  web  plate,  except  bridge  girders  without 
covers  on  which  this  distance  is  to  be  %"  greater 
than  the  width  of  web  plate.  Width  of  web  plate 
should  be  in  even  inches.  For  width  of  reinforce 
plates,  see  page  9.1. 

Symmetry  in  Small  Pieces 

7.  Laterals,  sway  bracing  and  connection  angles  should, 

when  possible,  be  detailed  symmetrical  so  that 
pieces  may  be  punched  alike. 

Avoid  Slight  Variations 

8.  Avoid   slight   variations   in   details.     When   a   piece 

cannot  be  made  symmetrical,  space  the  shop  rivets 
so  that  it  cannot  be  reversed  by  mistake.  When 
two  pieces  must  be  slightly  different,  they  should 
be  detailed  so  that  interchange  is  impossible. 

Three  Web  Chords 

9.  In  a  chord  composed  of  three  webs,  detail  rivets  in 

the  center  web  on  a  line  with  those  in  the  outside 
webs,  in  order  that  a  long  reamer  may  be  passed 
through  the  three  webs.  Though  this  is  not 
essential  for  shop  rivets,  it  is  well  to  have  them 
line  up  for  templet  work. 


POINTS  TO   BE  OBSERVED   IN   DETAILINQ  >1JO1 

TO  SIMPLIFY  FABRICATION 


Use  Few  Sizes 

1.  Sizes  and  shapes  used  in  detailing  should  as  far  as 

possible  be  of  the  same  section  as  the  main  material, 
thereby  reducing  the  number  of  different  sections 
on  the  structure.  Notify  the  designer  if  changes 
are  made  in  the  design. 

Connections  to  Variable  Girders 

2.  For  deck  plate  girder  spans  with  flanges  or  webs  of 

varying  thicknesses,  the  distance  center  to  center  of 
open  holes  in  cross  frames  and  the  distance  from 
center  of  girder  to  cross  frame  connection  should 
be  kept  constant,  wherever  possible.  This  applies 
also  to  the  connection  of  floor  beams  to  the  out- 
standing legs  of  stiffeners  in  through  plate  girder 
spans  having  flange  angles  of  varying  thickness. 

Bevel  Bed  Plates 

3.  For   spans   on   a  grade,    it   is   preferable  to  put  the 

necessary  bevel  in  the  loose  bed  plate  and  not  in 
the  sole  plate. 

Overrun  of  Diaphragms 

4.  When  diaphragms  or  separators  are  used  between  a 

series  of  beams,  consult  Plant  Engineer  regarding 
precautions  to  be  taken  against  over-run  or  under- 
run  of  group. 

Viaduct  Bents  Alike 

5.  Viaducts  on  a  grade  should  have  the  two  bents  of 

each  tower  made  alike.  This  can  be  done  by  adding 
fillers  on  top  of  the  up-grade  bent. 

Variations  in  Length  of  Girders 

6.  For  cross  girders  and  floor  girders,  varying  by  not 

more  than  1"  in  length,  add  fillers  at  ends  of  the 
girders  to  make  them  identical;  or  vary  the  gauge 
of  end  angles  to  keep  web  spacing  the  same. 

Bending  Long  Pieces 

7.  Details  should  be  arranged  so  that  a  bend  does  not 

come  at  the  end  of  a  long  member.  This  can  be 
avoided  by  making  a  splice  near  the  bend.  Avoid 
two  bends  in  one  piece. 


1O2  POINTS  TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN    DETAILING 

fO  SIMPLIFY  FABRICATION 

Curved  Plates 

1.  In  determining  the  size  material  to  use  for  plates 
shaped  like  a  segment  of  a  circular  ring,  consult  the 
fabricating  plant.  If  the  curve  is  slight,  some  plants 
can  bend  the  plates  by  roll-peening,  but  in  other 
cases  it  is  more  advantageous  to  shear  from  rec- 
tangular plates  of  greater  width. 


Curved  Beams 

2.  If  possible  avoid  bending  beams  or  channels  so  that 
they-  deflect  from  the  original  planes  of  their 
flanges.  See  pages  12.1  and  12.2. 


Lattice 

3.  On  small  latticed  columns  and  struts,  see  that  lacing 
is  sufficiently  spread,  especially  when  flanges  of 
channels  are  turned  in.  The  60°  slant  for  lacing 
cannot  be  followed  on  small  columns  as  it  is  too 
close  for  riveting.  It  is  difficult  to  rivet  sections 
where  the  clear  distance  between  flanges  is  less  than 
4 J/2  inches  to  5  inches.  Be  sure  that  the  opening 
between  metal  is  large  enough  to  admit  the  dolly 
bars  in  use  at  the  fabricating  plant. 


Shearing 

4.  Angles  for  web  members  of  trusses  and  laterals  should 
be  cut  square.  If  necessary  to  cut  on  a  bevel,  they 
should  be  detailed  so  that  they  can  be  sheared  in 
one  operation.  This  applies  to  plates  and  other 
shapes. 


POINTS  TO   BE  OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING  1O3 


TO  SIMPLIFY  ERECTION 

'  *  i  •  / 

1 .  In  designing  details,  care  should  be  taken  to  arrange 

all  joints  and  connections  so  that  the  work  can  be 
built  at  the  shop  with  a  minimum  cost  in  labor  and 
material,  and  can  be  erected  most  economically 
and  with  a  minimum  risk. 

2.  The   sequence   of  erection   should   be   considered   in 

making  the  details. 

3.  In  bridge  work,   connections  should   be  detailed  so 

that  spans  can  be  made  self-sustaining  and  safe  in 
the  shortest  possible  time. 

4.  Top  chord  sections  in  each  panel  are  put  in  place  after 

the  posts  and  bars  for  that  panel  are  erected.  In 
heavy  work  it  is  especially  desirable  that  the  details 
be  arranged  so  that  these  chord  sections  can  be 
lifted  above  the  posts  and  set  directly  into  place 
without  being  moved  endways  or  sideways.  For 
such  work,  plates  connecting  adjoining  sections 
should  be  shipped  loose. 

5.  It  is  usually  customary,  when  local  conditions  permit, 

to  put  the  floor  system  in  place  first  and  erect  the 
trusses  afterward.  This  method  of  procedure  has 
a  great  many  advantages  over  that  of  raising  the 
trusses  first,  viz.:  there  is  a  great  saving  in  false 
work,  as  longer  panels  can  be  used;  it  permits  bents 
to  be  placed  directly  under  the  panel  points  and 
the  new  floor  system  to  be  used  for  carrying  traffic 
and  running  out  material  for  the  trusses;  it  permits 
the  posts  to  be  bolted  to  the  floor  beams  and  released 
from  the  tackles  on  the  travelers;  it  fixes  the  exact 
position  of  the  shoes  on  the  piers  so  that  the  erection 
can  proceed  from  the  center  toward  either  fixed  or 
roller  end,  as  may  be  preferred;  it  gives  more 
opportunity  for  jacking  up  the  spans  to  secure 
proper  camber;  and  it  requires  a  minimum  amount 
of  blocking. 


1O4  POINTS   TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN    DETAILING 


TO  SIMPLIFY  ERECTION 

1.  Over  dangerous  streams  where  there  is  a  possibility 

of  loss  during  erection,  it  may  be  desirable  to  erect 
the  trusses  first.  This  brings  as  little  material  as 
possible  on  the  false  work.  A  minimum  amount  of 
material  is  thus  endangered.  Some  times  there  are 
local  conditions  which  make  it  imperative  to  erect 
the  trusses  first. 

2.  Therefore  in  all  through  truss  spans,  the  floor  connec- 

tions should  be  so  arranged  that  the  floor  system 
can  be  put  in  place  after  trusses  have  been  erected 
in  their  final  position,  and  vice  versa,  so  that 
trusses  can  be  erected  after  the  floor  system  has 
been  set  in  place. 

3.  For  through  plate  girder  spans,  the  stiffeners  should 

be  arranged  so  that  floor  system  can  be  put  in  place 
without  spreading  the  main  girders.  Also  on 
through  trough  floor  spans,  wherever  possible, 
details  should  be  arranged  so  that  trough  floor  can 
be  put  in  position  without  spreading  main  girders. 

4.  In  all  work,  as  far  as  practicable,  details  should  be 

arranged  so  that  members  can  be  swung  into  posi- 
tion without  shifting  from  their  final  position 
members  to  which  they  connect.  If  this  is  impos- 
sible, place  note  on  erection  plan  calling  erectors' 
attention  to  this  special  feature. 

5.  Stiffeners  to  which  cross  frames  or  floor  beams  connect 

should  not  be  crimped,  but  have  fillers.  The  out- 
standing legs  should  preferably  be  not  less  than 
5  inches,  and  never  less  than  4  inches.  Open  holes 
in  stiffener  angles  should  be  gauged  so  that  the 
cross  frames  can  be  swung  into  place  without 
spreading  the  main  girders. 


POINTS  TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING  1O5 

TO  SIMPLIFY  ERECTION 
Pin  Spans 

1.  The  sections  of  top  chords  nearest  the  center  should 

be  made  with  at  least  two  full  pin  holes.  In  skew 
spans  the  top  chord  splices  should  be  located  so 
that  the  two  opposite  panels  can  be  erected  without 
moving  traveler.  In  curved  top  bridges,  the  top 
chords  should  be  designed  so  that  each  panel  of 
truss  can  be  erected  and  self-sustained  before 
moving  the  traveler  to  the  next  panel. 

Pilot  Nut  Interference 

2.  When    portals    or    top    bracing    would    apparently 

interfere  with  the  use  of  long  pilot  nuts,  it  is  not 
necessary  or  desirable  to  ship  short  pilot  nuts. 
These  pieces  are  seldom,  if  ever,  erected  before  the 
pins  are  driven. 

CLEARANCES 

3.  See  that  ample  clearances  are  allowed.     In  allowing 

clearances  to  cover  shop  variations  for  cutting, 
shearing  and  coping,  any  clearance  LESS  THAN 

1/2  INCH   IS   EQUIVALENT   TO   NO   CLEARANCE. 

4.  For  riveted  web  members  entering  between  chords, 

allow  a  total  clearance  of  y%'  or  y^"  on  a  side. 

5.  For   plates  to   be  inserted   between   angles,  allow  a 

total  clearance  of  J/g". 

6.  For  beams  and  girders  with  top  and  bottom  connection 

angles,  whether  riveted  or  shipped  loose,  allow  l/±' 
clearance  between  top  and  bottom  angles. 

7.  When  beams  are  framed  directly  to  the  web  at  the 

upper  floor  of  heavy  two-story  columns,  to  facilitate 
erection,  the  rivets  above  the  connection  should  be 
countersunk  or  left  open  for  field  driving. 

Packing  of  Eyebars  and  Pin  Plates 

8.  In  pin  connected  bridges  with  eyebars  8  inches  and 

:  under,  allow  Vie  inch  clearance  for  each  eyebar 
and  an  additional  total  clearance  of  not  less  than  Y^ 
inch  between  the  two  sides  of  the  chord.  For 
eyebars  over  8  inches  up  to  and  including  12  inches, 
double  the  above  figures.  For  eyebars  over  12 
inches,  use  three  times  the  allowance  for  bars  8 
inches  and  under.  W^hen  more  than  two  pin 
plates  are  used  on  a  •  member,  allow  %2  inch 
additional  for  each  pin  plate. 


1O6  POINTS  TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN    DETAILING 

TO  SIMPLIFY  ERECTION 

CLEARANCES 
Clearance  at  Ends  of  Beams  and  Girders 

1.  For  crane  or  floor  girders,  milled   (or  made  exact), 

and  for  floor  beams  framing  between  columns, 
girders  or  beams,  allow  Vi6  inch  at  each  end.  For 
plate  girders,  not  milled  (or  made  exact),  allow 
Y%  inch  at  each  end. 

2.  For  all  structures  in  which  girders  or  beams  occur  in 

continuous  lines  over  150  ft.  long,  Plant  Engineer 
should  decide  what  precautions  are  necessary  to 
prevent  an  increase  or  decrease  in  total  extreme 
dimensions  of  the  building.  For  a  certain  percent- 
age of  the  connections,  girders  and  beams  may 
be  cut  short  and  fillers  provided.  Other  means  of 
accomplishing  the  result  may  be  found  advisable. 

Cross  Frame  Clearance 

3.  Cross  frames  should  be  made  of  such  a  depth  or  so 

detailed  as  to  permit  them  to  be  swung  into  place 
without  interfering  with  the  rivet  heads  in  flanges 
of  main  girders.  See  page  104.5. 

4.  When  the  cross  frames  of  the  deck  span  connect  to 

the  top  and  bottom  flange  of  the  girder,  allow  Vie 
inch  clearance  at  top  and  Vi6  inch  at  bottom. 

Clearance  for  Diagonals 

5.  In  erecting  diagonals  in  pih  spans,  it  is  customary  to 

connect  them  at  the  bottom  first  and  then  to  swing 
them  into  position  around  the  lower  pins  as  centers; 
A  clear  path  should  be  provided  for  pieces  erected 
in  this  way. 

Anchor  Bolt  Clearances 

6.  Holes  are  generally  Y%'  larger  than  diameter  of  bolt. 

Column  resting  directly  on  grillage : 
Punched  Hole  in  Column=Diameter  of  Anchor 

Bolt  +  y8"- 

Punched  Hole  in  Grillage=Diameter  of  Anchor 

Bolt  +  Vie". 

Column  resting  on  cast  base: 
Punched   Hole  in  Column=Diameter  of  Anchor 

Bolt  +  y8". 

Drilled      Hole      in    Base=Diameter     of     Anchor 
Bolt  +  Vie". 


POINTS  TO   BE  OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING  1O7 

TO  SIMPLIFY  ERECTION 

CLEARANCES 

Anchor  Bolt  Clearances — Continued 

1.  Column  resting  on  steel  slab: 

Punched  Hole  in  Column=Diameter  of  Anchor 

Bolt  +  y8". 
Drilled  Hole  in  Slab=E>iameter  of  Anchor  Bolt 

+  %"• 
Punched    Hole    in    Girder=Diameter  of  Anchor 

Bolt  -f  y16". 

2.  For  large  anchor  bolts  or  to  meet  special  conditions, 

it  may  be  desirable  to  have  the  holes  larger.  Special 
consideration  should  be  given  to  such  cases. 

3.  When  anchor  bolts  are  to  be  put  in  after  structure  is 

erected,  arrange  details  to  allow  drilling  of  holes 
with  material  in  position 

Movable  Bridge  Clearance 

4.  On  draw  spans  and  bascule  bridges,  the  clearance 

between  the  moving  member  and  the  nearest 
stationary  member  should  be  at  least  2  inches, 
preferably  more. 

5.  Fascia    plates    between    fixed    and    draw    spans    on 

highway  work  should  be  provided  with  means  of 
vertical  adjustment. 

Stagger  Turnbuckles 

6.  Adjustable  rods  or  bars  placed  close  together  should 

have  sleeve  nuts  or  turnbuckles  staggered. 

Clear  Rivet  Heads 

7.  An  interference  frequently  occurs  both  in  the  shop 

and  field  between  the  outstanding  flange  of  some 
piece  and  rivet  heads  of  the  piece  into  which  it 
connects.  This  should  be  avoided. 

Cut  Flanges  to  Clear 

8.  Girders  which  frame  into   webs  of  columns  should, 

when  necessary,  have  their  flanges  notched  to  clear 
rivet  heads  in  outstanding  legs  of  columns.  This 
will  permit  erection  without  spreading  columns. 


1O8  POINTS  TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN    DETAILING 

TO  SIMPLIFY  ERECTION 

CLEARANCES 
Clearance  Above  Rail 

1.  Note  whether  the  clearance  shown  on  stress  sheets  for 

railroad  bridges  is  from  top  or  from  base  of  rail. 

Clear  Old  Work 

2.  In  detailing  work  adjacent  to  old  work  or  to  walls, 

see  that  the  rivets  can  be  driven  wiien  work  is  in 
place.  Spandrel  beams  adjoining  old  walls  should 
be  detailed  to  swing  into  place  from  inside  of 
building. 

Entering  Connections 

3.  Entering  connections  should  be  avoided. 

Shifting  Members  to  Drive  Rivets 

4.  Work  should  be  detailed  so  that  members  can  be 

placed  in  final  position  before  riveting  is  commenced. 
Exceptions  should  be  noted  on  erection  drawings. 

Clearance  for  Driving 

5.  All  field  connections  should  be  examined  to  see  that 

they  can  be  driven  after  the  structure  is  erected. 
Draftsmen  should  inform  themselves  of  the  sizes 
and  types  of  pneumatic  hammers  in  use  and 
necessary  working  space  required. 

Expansion  Pockets 

6.  Girders  and  stringers  which  rest  in  expansion  pockets 

should  set  back  sufficiently  to  allow  the  insertion 
of  the  field  rivets  for  the  end  connection  of  the 
adjacent  fixed  member,  as  both  members  are  in 
place  before  the  rivets  are  driven. 

Lateral  Plates  Clear  Ties 

7.  On  deck  girder  spans  and  on  stringers  in  through 

spans,  lateral  plates  and  rivet  heads  should  be  kept 
low  enough  to  clear  the  ties. 


POINTS  TO   BE  OBSERVED    IN    DETAILING  1O9 

TO    SIMPLIFY    ERECTION 

Slotted  Holes  for  Anchors 

1.  In  both  ends  of  plate  girders  less  than  50  ft.  use 

slotted  holes,  or  holes  of  extra  large  diameter,  for 
anchor  bolts. 

Length  of  Slots 

2.  The  length  of  slots  in  expansion  details  should  be 

sufficient  to  allow  for  a  movement  in  either  direction 
equal  to  the  combined  effect  of  temperature  change, 
stress  deformation  and  inaccurate  workmanship. 

Erection  Seats 

3.  It  is  not  necessary  to  provide  erection  seats  for  beams 

framing  into  columns  or  girders,  except  when  beams 
frame  in  opposite  on  web  of  plate  and  angle  columns 
or  girders  and  take  the  same  open  holes. 

4.  Erection  seats  should  usually  be  provided  for  plate 

girders  framing  into  girders  or  columns. 

5.  When  erection  seats  are  provided,  a  clearance  of  y%' 

should  be  left  between  the  bottom  of  the  girder 
and  the  seat  angle  to  allow  for  inaccuracies  in  setting 
the  seat.  No  clearance  should  be  provided  when 
open  holes  are  reamed  to  metal  templet. 

Stitch  Loose  Fillers 

6.  Fillers  should  be  shop  riveted  to  members.     Avoid 

loose  fillers  where  possible. 

Stitch  Loose  Covers 

7.  When  a  long  line  of  field  rivets  occurs  in  the  cover, 

web  or  reinforcing  plates  of  a  column,  chord  or 
other  built-up  member,  provide  occasional  rivets 
(countersunk  if  necessary)  to  keep  the  plate  in 
contact  with  the  main  section  of  the  member.  See 
Typical  Drawings. 

Parts  Reversible 

8.  If  practicable  arrange  details  of  a  member  so  that  it 

may  be  reversed  in  erection. 

Parts  Not  Reversible 

9.  When  members  are  nearly  but  not  quite  symmetrical 

and  it  is  possible  to  erect  them  reversed  or  inverted, 
mark  the  piece  to  indicate  the  way  it  should  enter 
the  structure.  Thus,:  " Mark  This  End  Toward 
Center'  "  or  "Mark  This  Side  Up.'  " 


11O  POINTS  TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN    DETAILING 

TO  SIMPLIFY  ERECTION 

Marking  Directions 

1.  When  the  position  in  which  a  member  is  to  be  placed 

in  a  structure  cannot  readily  be  determined  from 
the  member  itself  and  the  erection  plans,  the  sides 
or  ends  of  member  should  be  marked  showing 
direction  in  which  member  is  to  be  set. 

Extra  Field  Work 

2.  All  drilling  and  cutting  to  be  done  in  the  field  should 

be  clearly  noted  on  the  detail  and  erection  drawings 
before  final  approval.  If  chargeable  to  the  cus- 
tomer, drawing  must  so  state,  and  Plant  Engineer 
shall  at  once  take  the  matter  up  with  the  Division 
Engineer  in  order  that  any  extra  charge  may  be 
adjusted. 

Special  Field  Drilling 

3.  Sometimes  it  is  advisable  to  drill  certain  holes  in  the 

field.  This  may  occur  in  special  cases  where 
adjustment  is  needed  or  when  the  drawing  room 
finds  it  impracticable  to  locate  a  connection.  In 
such  cases  the  Plant  Engineer  should  be  consulted. 
A  note  should  be  added  to  the  erection  drawing 
calling  attention  to  this  special  work. 

Holes  for  Tap  Bolts 

4.  If  tap  bolts  are  to  be  used  for  field  connections  which 

transmit  shear,  the  holes  to  be  tapped  should  be 
drilled  either  in  the  shop  or  in  the  field,  using  the 
connecting  piece  as  a  templet.  This  avoids  drifting, 
which  destroys  the  threads.  If  the  connections  do 
not  transmit  shear,  the  drilling  may  be  avoided  by 
making  the  holes  in  the  connecting  piece  large 
enough  to  provide  for  slight  irregularity  in  spacing. 

Abutting  Deck  Spans 

5.  When  two  spans  abut  on  a  bent,  as  in  a  viaduct, 

details  should  be  arranged  so  that  either  span  can 
be  set  in  place  entirely  independent  of  the  other. 
The  end  cross  frames  should  be  detailed  to  be  swung 
into  place  from  the  center. 


POINTS   TO   BE  OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING  111 

TO  SIMPLIFY  ERECTION 

Deck  Girders  Erected  by  A.  B.  Co. 

1.  On  all  deck  plate  girder  work  erected  by  the  American 
Bridge  Company,  the  Erection  Department  should 
be  advised  as  soon  as  possible,  whether  the  spans 
will  be  detailed  riveted  up  or  knocked  down  for 
shipment.  They  should  also  be  advised  that  unless 
prompt  objection  is  made  the  spans  will  be  shipped 
as  outlined. 


Holes  for  Auxiliary  Work 

2.  Provide  holes  in  steel  work  for  connecting  all  auxiliary 

work,  such  as  nailing  strips,  spiking  pieces,  skylight 
curbs,  windows,  doors,  etc.  The  method  of  attach- 
ing auxiliary  work  to  the  steel  work  should  be 
thoroughly  understood. 

Replacing  Old  Bridges 

3.  In  replacing  an  old  bridge  of  more  than  one  span, 

a  separate  bed  plate  should  be  provided  for  each 
shoe. 


Column  Overrun 

4.  The  overrun  or  packing  out  of  cover  plates  on  built 
up  columns  need  be  considered  only  when  there 
are  four  or  more  cover  plates  on  a  face,  in1  which 
case  the  distance  out  to  out  of  covers -should  be 
figured  Y%"  more  than  the  distance  back  to  back  of 
angles,  plus  the  thickness  of  the  covers. 


Anchor  Bolts  in  Advance 

5.  Anchor  bolts  built  into  the  masonry  before  the  erection 

of  the  steel  work  on  domestic  and  export  work 
should  be  shipped  in  advance  unless  otherwise 
requested. 

6.  Anchor  bolts  to  be  set  after  steel  work  is  erected  need 

not  be  shipped  in  advance. 


112  POINTS   TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING 

TO  IMPROVE  AND  SIMPLIFY  THE  DESIGN 

Types  of  Details 

1.  Other  things  being  equal,  use  details  requiring  the 

smallest  number  of  pieces.  The  simplest  detail  is 
usually  the  cheapest  and  best. 

2.  When  beams  connect  to  the  flange  face  of  plate  and 

angle  columns,  it  is  preferable  to  use  web  connection 
angles  riveted  to  the  beams. 

3.  When  beams  connect  to  the  web  face,  it  is  preferable 

to  use  seat  angles.  v,v 

4.  When  columns  are  of  light  section  and  maj^  be  readily 

tilted  or  sprung,  it  is  preferable  to  use  web  connec- 
tion angles  riveted  to  the  beams  for  both  web  and 
flange  faces  of  columns. 

5.  For  beams  connecting  to  girders,  use  a  seat  (without 

stiffeners)  when  possible  (see  pages  100.1  to  100.4), 
and  a  side  clip  riveted  on  girders.  Do  not  provide 
any  holes  for  connecting  beams  to  seats.  When  the 
seat  requires  stiffeners,  it  is  better  from  a  shop  point 
of  view  to  frame  beams  with  regular  connection 
angles,  unless  the  stiffeners  under  the  seat  can  be 
made  to  take  the  place  of  regular  stiffeners  required 
on  the  plate  girders. 

6.  On  columns  composed  of  channels  10"  and  under, 

use  details  that  require  no  stiffeners  for  connecting 
to  web  face,  and  as  far  as  possible  details  that 
eliminate  the  use  of  all  connections  to  the  webs  of 
any  size  of  channels. 

7.  On  box  columns  eliminate  as  far  as  possible  details 

that  require  rivets  to  be  driven  through  the  cover 
plates  alone,  as  such  rivets  require  an  additional 
operation  in  riveting  and  assembling. 

Metal  over  Metal 

8.  In  details  which  are  designed  to  transfer  concentrated 

loads  by  direct  bearing,  care  must  be  used  to  get 
metal  over  metal.  Intervening  plates  should  not  be 
counted  upon  to  distribute  the  load  unless  an  analy- 
sis of  stress  proves  them  equal  to  it. 


POINTS   TO   BE  OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING 


113 


TO  IMPROVE  AND  SIMPLIFY  THE  DESIGN 

Slabs 

1.  In  the  transmission  of  pressure,  steel  slabs  may  be 

used  when  rolled  plates  cannot  be  obtained  of 
sufficient  thickness  to  insure  an  even  distribution 
of  stress.  (Plates  thicker  than  the  published 
maximum  up  to  the  tabulated  minimum  thickness 
of  slabs  can  usually  be  obtained  by  omitting  the 
specification  of  physical  test.)  Rolled  slabs  are 
cheaper  than  forged  slabs,  built  bases,  or  castings; 
but  forged  slabs  and  castings  can  sometimes  be 
obtained  more  quickly,  for  this  reason  their  use 
is  permitted  when  the  question  of  delivery  is  an 
important  consideration. 

2.  The  limiting  sizes  of  rolled  and  forged  slabs  are : 


Carnegie 
(Rolled) 

Pencoyd 
(Rolled) 

Gary 
(Forged) 

Minimum  thickness  
Maximum  thickness  
Minimum  width  
Maximum  width  
Minimum  length  
Maximum  length  

4' 
15' 
15' 

50' 
3'0' 
20'  0' 

3' 
15' 
15' 
25' 
3'0' 
20'  0' 

•  •  jo/;  • 

'  '  36"  ' 
"i5'0"" 

3.  Limiting  sizes  are  also  subject  to  the  equipment  of 

the  fabricating  plant. 

4.  The  limiting  weight  at  Carnegie  Mills  is   7,000  lb., 

at  Pencoyd  Mills  is  8,000  lb.  and  at  Gary  Forge  is 
18,000  lb. 

5.  When   slabs   are  used   have   as    few    thicknesses    as 

possible.    Ordering  slabs,  see  pages  49.6  to  50.1. 

Deck  Girder  Laterals 

6.  Square  deck  plate  girder  spans  should  have  an  even 

number  of  panels  in  the  lateral  system,  so  that  the 
girders  can  be  made  symmetrical  about  center. 

7.  Skew  deck  plate  girder  spans  should  have  an  odd 

number  of  panels  in  the  lateral  system,  so  that  the 
girders  can  be  turned  end  for  end. 
Lintels 

8.  When  angle  lintels  are  used,  it  is  not  necessary  to 

rivet  the  angles  together  unless  called  for.  Plain 
angles  should  be  used.  Preference  should  be  given 
to  plain  angle  over  cast  iron  lintels. 

9.  When  I  beams  and  channels  are  used   as  lintels,  no 

anchors  need  be  provided. 


114  POINTS  TO   BE  OBSERVED   IN    DETAILING 

TO  IMPROVE  AND  SIMPLIFY  THE  DESIGN 

Draw  for  Diagonals 

1.  For    transverse,    longitudinal,    and    lateral    diagonal 

bracing  of  one  or  more  angles,  allow  the  following 
draw: 

For  lengths  up  to  and  including  10  ft.,  nothing. 
"         "        11  ft  to  20  ft.,  inc.,  shorten  %e  in. 
21ft.  to  35  ft.    "  "       y8  in. 

over  35  ft.  "       %e  in. 

Drop  sixteenths,  but  do  not  vary  from  above  more 
than  Vie  in. 

2.  These  deductions  are  to  be  made  in  the  length  of 

laterals  for  deck  or  through  truss  spans  from  the 
lengths  computed  and  proper  allowances  made  for 
camber.  (See  pages  128.1  to  130.2.)  Whether 
laterals  attach  to  stringers  or  not  does  not  affect 
the  rule. 
(Truss  diagonals,  see  page  130.1.) 

Mullions 

3.  Mullions  and  other  members  running  from  floor  to 

floor  on  office  buildings  should  be  detailed  with 
vertically  slotted  holes  in  one  end  to  prevent  their 
taking  loads  for  which  they  are  not  designed.  The 
slotted  holes  should  be  in  the  connection  angles  and 
not  in  the  main  material. 

Bases  in  Concrete 

4.  When   built   column   bases   and   grillage   girders   are 

imbedded  in  concrete,  if  acceptable  to  architect, 
use  full  head  rivets. 

Upset  Rods 

5.  Rods  J/g"  or  less  in  diameter  should  not  be  upset; 

where  necessary  to  obtain  sufficient  section,  increase 
the  diameter.  Use  cold  rolled  threads  when 
possible.  See  pages  14.7  and  50.4. 

6.  Avoid  the  use  of  clevises  on  rods  Ij/s"  in  diameter 

and  less.  Use  the  angle  connection  as  shown  in 
Standard  for  Detailing  or  the  bevel  cast  washer. 
Rods  over  \Y%'  in  diameter  should  be  connected 
by  clevises. 


POINTS   TO    BE   OBSERVED    IN    DETAILING  116 

TO  IMPROVE  AND  SIMPLIFY  THE  DESIGN 

Water  Pockets 

1.  Avoid  forming  water  pockets  in  structures  exposed  to 

the  weather,  or  provide  a  drain  hole  where  it  will 
effectually  drain  the  pocket. 

Lateral  Connections 

2.  Unless  it  increases  the  size  of  lateral  plate  dispropor- 

tionately, omit  the  lugs  from  light  lateral  angles 
which  require  no  more  than  five  rivets. 

Castings 

3.  Before  detailing  castings,  refer  to  records  and  find  out 

if  old  patterns  can  be  used  (preferably  without 
alteration).  Use  old  patterns  when  possible. 

4.  In  similar  castings,  when  there  are  variations  in  heights 

not  exceeding  1  inch,  take  up  the  variation  by 
thickening  the  top  or  bottom. 

5.  Holes  in  castings  which  connect  to  steel  work  should  be 

drilled,  not  cored. 

6.  All  cast  shoes  or  bases  must  be  planed  on  top  and 

bottom  except  those  which  are  to  be  grouted  when 
the  bottom  need  not  be  planed.  (See  page  135.6.) 

7.  Weep  holes  should  be  put  in  all  castings  where  water 

is  liable  to  collect  and  freeze. 

Anchor  Bolt  Types 

8.  For  anchor  bolts  built  in  masonry,  use  a  rod  with  nut 

at  each  end  (not  a  forged  head  at  one  end),  see 
Standards  for  Detailing.  Use  cold  rolled  threaded 
or  swedged  anchor  bolts  where  masonry  is  to  be 
drilled  for  bolts. 

Crane  Rail  Splices 

9.  Crane  rails  should  not  be  spliced  at  the  same  points 

as  the  girders  or  beams  supporting  them. 

Purlin  and  Girt  Spacing 

10.     When  sheathing  is  used,  purlin  spacing  should  suit 
stock  sizes  of  lumber.     When  corrugated  sheeting 
is  used,  purlin  and  girt  spacing  should  be  arranged 
to  suit  standard  lengths  of  corrugated  steel. 
Allowable  spacing  on  page  139.7. 


116  POINTS  TO   BE  OBSERVED   IN    DETAILING 

MISCELLANEOUS 
Templet  Shop  to  Determine  Lengths 

1.  In  built  member  of  5  feet  depth  or  less,  with  latticed 

web  between  chords,  not  parallel,  the  draftsman 
should  neglect  figuring  lengths  and  inclinations, 
leaving  them  for  the  templet  shop  to  determine. 

Mark  Ends  of  Girders 

2.  Mark  the  ends  of  girders  which  go  at  the  same  end  of 

bridge  "X,"  or  " North,"  or  "to  New  York,"  so 
that  every  advantage  of  knowing  this  relation  may 
be  had  in  the  shop  and  in  loading  for  shipment. 
Add  a  note  calling  attention  to  this  mark. 

Holes  in  Checkered  Plates 

3.  Avoid  countersinking  holes  in  checkered  plates.     Use 

flat  headed  bolts,  or  screw  headed  bolts,  in  places 
where  the  nuts  cannot  be  turned  with  a  wrench. 
Buckle  Plates 

4.  For  information  regarding  details,  consult  "  Standard 

for  Detailing" — Buckle  Plates. 

5.  The  field  riveting  of  buckle  plate  floors  is  sometimes 

cheapened  by  making  the  drainage  holes  large 
enough  (about  \Y^'  diameter)  to  allow  the  passage 
of  rivets  to  the  sticker,  who  is  below  the  floor. 
If  this  method  of  erection  meets  with  the  approval 
of  the  Erection  Department,  endeavor  to  have  the 
details  approved  with  these  large  drainage  holes. 

Name  Plates 

6.  Put  A.  B.  Co.  name  plates  on  all  structures  where 

they  would  have  any  advertising  value. 

GALVANIZED  STRUCTURAL  MATERIAL 
Three  Processes  of  Galvanizing 

7.  The  hot  process  consists  in  dipping  the  piece  in  molten 

spelter;  the  electric  process  consists  in  coating  by 
electric  contact ;  and  sherardizing  consists  in  placing 
the  piece  in  an  air-tight  tube  filled  with  zinc  oxide 
and  then  heated  to  the  required  temperature,  to  be 
removed  after  cooling. 

8.  The  hot  process  is  used  in  coating  structural  material 

and  castings;  the  other  two  processes  for  bolts  and 
small  castings. 


POINTS  TO   BE   OBSERVED   IN    DETAILING  117 

MISCELLANEOUS 
GALVANIZED  STRUCTURAL  MATERIAL 

Cleaning 

1.  Before  galvanizing,  all  mill  scale,   rust,   grease  and 

paint  should  be  'removed  from  the  surface.  This 
is  done  by  immersing  the  piece  first  in  a  bath 
containing  a  solution  of  sulphuric  acid  to  remove 
the  objectional  matter  and  then  in  water  to  wash  off 
the  acid.  Finally  the  piece  is  dipped  in  a  solution 
of  ammonium  chloride  after  which  it  is  ready  to  be 
galvanized. 

Detailing  Material  to  be  Galvanized 

2.  The  most  desirable  material  for  the  hot  process  is 

straight  plain  angles  and  shapes,  preferably  not  more 
than  24'  9"  long  (the  length  of  the  pot),  but  by 
turning  the  piece  it  is  possible  to  galvanize  a  31'  0" 
length.  Built  up  members  should  not  exceed 
24'  9"  in  length.  Bent  work  decreases  the  output 
and  increases  the  cost  of  galvanizing. 

3.  The  pot  is  40"  deep  and  30"  wide.     Pieces  wider 

than  the  depth  of  the  pot  must  be  turned  both  in 
the  pickling  and  spelter  tanks. 

4.  Before  proceeding  with  the  fabrication  of  any  material 

to  be  galvanized  whose  dimensions  approach  the 
maximum,  the  Shiftier  Plant  should  be  consulted. 

5.  Work  riveted  in  the  shop  is  more  expensive  to  gal- 

vanize than  plain  material.  Gusset  plates  should 
not  be  riveted  to  angles. 

6.  Field   connections   generally  should   be   bolted   (not 

riveted)  with  galvanized  bolts. 


Bolts 


Unless  otherwise  specified  bolts  should  be  sherardized, 
as  hot  galvanizing  fills  the  threads  with  spelter.  If 
hot  galvanizing  is  specified  for  bolts,  the  threads 
should  be  cut  deeper  than  standard  or  re-cut  after 
galvanizing. 


118  POINTS  TO   BE   OBSERVED    IN    DETAILING 

MISCELLANEOUS 

GALVANIZED  STRUCTURAL  MATERIAL 
Marking  for  Identification 

1 .  The  mill  and  shop  marks  should  be  put  on  with  tailor's 
chalk  instead  of  paint.  Erection  marks  should  be 
stamped  with  a  steel  stencil  in  a  definite  place  on 
each  piece. 

Marking  instructions  on  mill  orders,  page  50.7. 


Weight  of  Galvanized  Material 

2.  In  figuring  the  weight  of  galvanized  structural  material, 
it  should  be  assumed  that  galvanizing  adds  to  the 
weight  approximately  .08  pounds  per  square  foot  of 
surface  covered. 


CAR  LOAD  SHIPMENTS 

3.  Detail  work  as  far  as  possible  to  obtain  full  car  load 

lots  for  shipment.     (See  page  133.2.) 

4.  On  contracts  for  tanks,  smoke  stacks,  tubular  piers  or 

pipes,  which  are  shipped  west  of  the  Mississippi 
River,  if  there  is  any  question  as  to  whether  they 
should  be  shipped  knocked  down  or  riveted  up, 
the  matter  should  be  referred  at  once  to  the  Division 
Engineer.  There  is  a  great  difference  in  freight 
rates,  particularly  on  less  than  car  load  lots,  on 
shipments  into  that  territory. 


POINTS  TO  BE  OBSERVED  IN  DETAILING        119 

MISCELLANEOUS 

WATERTIGHT  WORK 
Riveting 

1.  The  diameter,  pitch   and  arrangement  of  rivets  are 

to  be  determined  by  the  thickness  of  the  plates  or 
bars  which  they  connect. 

2.  The  maximum  spacing  for  rivets  in  watertight  work 

is  4  diameters. 

3.  The  maximum  spacing  for  rivets  in  oiltight  work  is 

3^  diameters. 

4.  The  minimum  spacing  for  rivets  is  2}^  diameters. 


5.     All    seams    should    be  ) 

chain  riveted.'  }  ^-<H>^-<£-0-  c    -$—•  $ 


6.  The  distance  between  lines  of  rivets  in  seams  or  butts, 

if  chain  riveted,  should  not  be  less  than  3  diameters; 
if  staggered,  not  less  than  lJ/£  diameters.  Avoid 
staggering  rivets  if  possible. 

7.  Longitudinal  seams  should  be  single  riveted    when 

plates  are  %"  thick  or  less,  double  riveted  when 
plates  are  %e"  to  1"  thick,  and  triple  riveted  when 
plates  are  over  1"  thick. 

8.  Overlapped   butts   or   single   butt   straps   should   be 

double  riveted  when  plates  are  y%"  thick  or  less, 
triple  riveted  when  plates  are  KQ"  to  %e"  thick,  and 
quadruple  riveted  when  plates  are  Y%'  or  %" 
thick.  When  plates  are  over  %"  thick  butts 
should  have  double  straps  triple  riveted. 

9.  Butt  straps  should  be  y16"  thicker  than  the  plates 

they  connect. 

ILLUSTRATIONS: 


OVERLAPPED  BUTT  OR  LAPPED  SPLICE 


SINGLE  BUTT  STRAP 


DOUBLE  BUTT  STRAP 


12O  POINTS  TO   BE  OBSERVED   IN   DETAILING 

MISCELLANEOUS 

WATERTIGHT  WORK 
Punching 

1.  WHen'  specifications  require  that  plates  be  punched 

from  the  faying  surfaces  (surfaces  in  contact  in 
completed  work),  it  is  preferable,  except  for  plates 
5/40"  and  less  in  thickness  to  sub-punch  and  ream 
all  holes  in  order  to  avoid  turning  the  plates  at  the 
punch.  This  clause  of  the  specification  is  often 
waived  on  thin  plates,  as  for  these  plates  its  observ- 
ance accomplishes  nothing. 

Edge  Distances 

2.  The  distance  from  center  of  hole  to  extreme  point  of 

bevel  sheared  edge  of  plate  should  be  not  less  than 
1^2  diameters,  and  when  calked  not  more  than 
diameters  of  the  rivet. 


Calking 

3.  Calking  edges  of  %"  plates  or  less  are  to  be  bevel 

sheared.     If  allowed  by  customer,  plates  over  %" 
thick  are  to  be  sheared  straight. 

4.  The  bevel  on  plates  %6"  to  %"  thick,  inclusive,  should 

be  about  30  degrees,  and  on  plates  over  %"  thick 
should  be  about  3/16". 

5  Ordinarily  plates  less  than  3/16"  thick  are  not  calked, 
but  canvas  or  lampwick  is  placed  in  the  seam  to 
make  it  watertight. 

6.  Ambridge  plant  can  bevel-shear  plates  Y^  thick  or 
less. 


EXPORT  WORK  121 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

DEPARTMENT  OF  CIVIL  ENGINEERIN' 

BERKELEY,  CAUFORNfA 

CHAPTER  IX 

EXPORT  WORK 


General 


1.  All  contracts  for  work  in  foreign  countries  are  taken 

by  the  United  States  Steel  Products  Company, 
hereinafter  referred  to  as  the  "  Export  Company." 

2.  Lattice  girders  and  roof  trusses  intended  for  water 

shipment  are  shipped  " knocked  down."  Connec- 
tion plates  if  not  too  large  and  not  projecting  too 
far  beyond  the  main  member  are  riveted  to  the 
chords.  Larger  connection  plates  such  as  those  at 
the  heel  and  peak  of  roof  trusses  are  generally 
shipped  loose.  On  large  trusses  the  intermediate 
gusset  plates  are  sometimes  shipped  loose.  Web 
members  are  generally  shipped  as  simple  punched 
angles,  although  two  or  more  angles  comprising 
a  member  should  be  shipped  riveted  together. 
Purlin  connections  are  generally  shipped  loose. 

3.  Pieces  are  shipped  this  way  to  prevent  their  being 

bent  or  distorted  from  handling  in  loading,  unload- 
ing and  storing,  also  in  the  event  of  a  shifting  of  the 
cargo.  Furthermore  the  cost  of  ocean  freight  is 
reduced  by  keeping  the  rate  on  as  near  a  weight 
basis  as  possible. 

4.  The  steamship  companies  limit  the  sizes  and  weights 

of  material  to  such  sizes  and  weights  as  they  can 
handle  and  store.  The  governing  features  are  the 
capacity  of  the  lifting  apparatus,  the  size  of  the 
hatches  and  the  available  room  in  the  hold.  As 
steamers  are  differently  constructed,  these  limits 
vary.  Where  they  are  not  given,  it  is  necessary  to 
follow  what  is  known  to  be  safe. 


122  EXPORT  WORK 

General — Continued 

1.  Steamship  companies  charge  for  freight  either  on  a 
weight  or  a  measurement  basis,  i.  e.,  a  rate  per 
gross  ton,  or  a  rate  per  cubic  foot.  A  combination 
of  both  rates  is  often  used,  in  fact  rates  are  applied 
singly  or  in  combination,  the  determining  feature 
being  the  method  that  will  bring  the  greatest 
return  to  the  steamship  company.  In  adjusting 
rates  each  piece  in  the  shipment  is  passed  upon 
separately.  The  cubical  contents  of  a  member  is 
computed  by  multiplying  its  length  by  its  greatest 
height  by  its  greatest  width  regardless  of  the  shape 
of  the  piece.  A  cubic  foot  is  considered  equivalent 
to  56  Ib.  or  40  cubic  feet  equivalent  to  one  ton  of 
2240  Ib. 


Rail  or  Water  Shipment 

2.  Note  whether  shipment  is  specified  by  rail  or  by 
water.  When  rail  shipment  is  not  distinctly 
specified,  assume  water  shipment. 


Extreme  Size  and  Weight  of  Members 

3.     For  water  shipments  report  as  soon  as  possible  to 
Export  Company  through  Division  Engineer : 

(a)  Pieces  over  30  feet  long,  with  weights. 

(b)  Pieces  over  4,000  Ib.  with  dimensions. 

(c)  Pieces  of  unusual  construction. 

When  possible,  keep  all  pieces  under  30  feet  in  length 
and  less  than  4,000  Ib.  in  weight. 


Detailing 

4.  If  detailing  a  contract  knocked  down  requires  a 
departure  from  the  customer's  plans,  the  attention 
of  the  Export  Company  should  be  called  to  it 
through  the  Division  Engineer  in  order  that  no 
back  charge  will  be  made  for  extra  field  riveting. 


EXPORT   WORK  123 

Detailing — Continued 

1.  Detail  export  work,   as  far  as  practicable,  knocked 

down  and  generally  so  that  ocean  freight  is  paid  by 
weight  and  not  by  measurement.  When  a  gross 
ton  of  2240  Ib.  occupies  more  than  40  cubic  feet  of 
space,  the  ocean  freight  has  to  be  paid  by  measure- 
ment, at  a  rate  based  on  the  assumption  that  40 
cubic  feet  is  the  equivalent  of  a  gross  ton.  Some- 
times the  extra  shop  cost  in  fabricating  to  save 
freight  exceeds  the  saving,  in  which  case  it  is  better 
to  pay  excess  freight.  The  Export  Company  will 
furnish  upon  request  through  the  Division  Engineer 
the  extra  tariff  rates  for  longer  and  heavier  pieces. 
The  manner  of  detailing  is  left  to  the  discretion  of 
the  Plant  Engineer. 

2.  The  Export  Company's  method  of  making  up  their 

estimate  of  ocean  "freight  is  to  take  the  actual  rate 
which  they  pay  for  weight,  and,  after  sizing  up  the 
particular  inquiry  and  determing  what  percentage 
will  have  to  be  shipped  by  measurement-freight, 
arbitrarily  fix  a  rate  by  adding  a  percentage  to  the 
actual  weight  rate.  They  then  multiply  the 
estimated  weight  of  the  structure  by  the  arbitrary 
or  estimated  rate. 

3.  The  information  sheets  on  all  lump  sum  export  orders 

give  the  total  estimated  freight  rate  and  also  the 
actual  unit  rates  for  weight  and  measurement. 

4.  On  pound  price  contracts  the  information  sheet  gives 

the  actual  unit  rates  for  weight  and  measurement 
and  also  the  arbitrary  rate  assumed  in  estimating. 
These  will  enable  the  drawing  room  to  determine 
approximately  what  percentage  of  the  work  may 
be  safely  paid  for  by  measure. 

5.  If,  in  order  to  use  stock,  it  is  necessary  to  make 

changes  in  material  called  for  on  customer's  plans, 
consult  the  Division  Engineer. 

6.  On  export  shipments  by  water,  it  is  important  to 

fulfil  promises  of  delivery,  as  in  many  cases  the 
space  required  for  the  shipment  is  contracted  for 
in  advance.  Failure  to  have  the  material  loaded 
when  the  ship  sails  does  not  release  the  Export 
Company  from  .their  obligation  to  pay  for  the  space. 


124  EXPORT   WORK 

Detailing — Continued 

1.  Projecting  pieces  should  generally  be  shipped  loose, 

especially  where  the  field  connections  are  bolted. 
Where  the  field  connections  are  riveted,  it  may  be 
necessary  to  rivet  them  on  at  the  shop.  In  such 
cases  they  should  be  securely  blocked  for  protection 
against  bending  and  breakage,  bearing  in  mind  the 
many  handlings  to  which  they  are  subject.  The 
Plant  Engineer  is  to  use  his  discretion  in  this 
matter. 

2.  Curved  material  should  be  detailed  so  that  it  can  be 

nested  for  shipment. 

3.  Lump   sum   orders   should   be   detailed   so  that  the 

shipped  weight  will  agree,  as  closely  as  possible, 
with  the  estimated  weight. 

4.  For  pin  bridges  two  pilot  and  driving  nuts  for  each 

size  pin  on  each  bridge  should  be  furnished. 

5.  Discretion  should  be  used  in  abbreviating  words  on 

detail  drawings. 

Title  and  Order  Number 

6.  The  name  " United  States  Steel  Products  Company" 

and  the  X.  A.  B.  number  must  appear  on  each  sheet 
as  a  conspicuous  part  of  the  title.  The  name  of 
the  bridge  or  structure  should  be  included  in  the 
title. 

Masonry  Plans. 

7.  Masonry  plans  should  be  made  and  sent  promptly 

to  Export  Company  for  all  orders. 

8.  No  abbreviations  should  be  used  on  masonry  plans. 

9.  Dimensions  should  be  given  in  both  the  English  and 

the  Metric  Systems  on  masonry  plans  for  structures 
in  Latin  countries. 

Anchor  Bolts 

10.  When  anchor  bolts  are  built  in  the  masonry,  they 
should  be  shipped  promptly  and  in  advance  of  the 
other  material,  unless  instructions  are  received  to 
the  contrary.  The  drawings  should  be  placed  in 
the  shop  as  soon  as  possible.  Note  on  drawings^ 
and  bills  "Ship  in  Advance." 


EXPORT   WORK  125 

Drawings  for  Approval 

1.  In  general,  drawings,  when  sent  for  approval,  should 

be  finally  checked  and  complete  for  the  order.  No 
departure  should  be  made  from  this  rule,  except  on 
rush  or  large  orders,  and  then  only  after  consulting 
the  Export  Company. 

Erection  Drawings 

2.  Erection  drawings  should  be  clearly  made  and  show 

plainly  how  the  work  goes  together.  They  should 
contain  more  detailed  information  than  is  usually 
given  on  erection  drawings  for  domestic  work. 

3.  No  abbreviations  should  be  used  on  erection  drawings. 

4.  Dimensions  should  be  given  in  both  the  English  and 

the  Metric  Systems  on  erection  drawings  for 
structures  in  Latin  countries. 

5.  Erection  drawings  should  show  in  detail  the  method 

of  fastening  corrugated  steel,  gutters,  louvres, 
doors,  windows,  etc. 

6.  Erection  drawings  for  bridges  should  show  the  camber. 

Erector's  Rivet  and  Bolt  List 

7.  Erector's  rivet  and  bolt  list  should  always  show  the 

location  of  all  rivets  and  bolts.  This  feature 
should  be  given  special  consideration. 

Corrugated  Steel 

8.  On  orders  for  corrugated  steel  note  that  this  material 

must  be  wrapped  in  tarred  felt. 

Marking  and  Numbering 

9.  All  erection  marks  should  be  stamped  on  the  steel 

with  a  steel  die  and  also  marked  with  paint. 

10.  For   all   shipments   by   water   this   material   should 

have  special  marks  (in  accordance  with  customer's 
requirements)  and  consecutive  numbering. 

11.  For  " all-rail"  shipments  into  Canada,  no  system  of 

special  marks  or  consecutive  numbers  is  required. 

12.  For  " all-rail"  shipments  into  Mexico,  the  customs 

requirements  are  that  special  marks  (designated 
by  Export  Company)  are  to  be  placed  on  the 
material,  but  no  consecutive  numbering  is  required. 

13.  In  some  cases  it  is  specified  that  the  weight  in  "kilos" 

must  be  marked  on  each  piece.  This  is  a  customs 
requirement  and  must  be  adhered  to. 


126  EXPORT   WORK 

Shipping  Bills 

1.  All  special  export  marks  and  special  instructions  for 

marking  should  be  given  on  the  first  page  of  shipping 
bill.  When  orders  are  divided  among  various 
plants  and  departments,  a  separate  series  of  export 
shipment  numbers  is  to  be  allotted  each  plant  or 
department.  Care  should  be  taken  that  sufficient 
intervening  numbers  are  allotted  each  plant  or 
department. 

2.  The  weight  of  individual  pieces  should  be  given  for 

all  members  on  either  lump  sum  or  pound  price 
contracts. 

3.  The  over-all  dimensions  to  the  nearest  inch  should  be 

given  for  all  fabricated  material  and  unusual  care 
used  in  calculating  them.  Plain  or  punched  flat 
plates  or  angles  should  be  billed  to  exact  dimensions, 
thus: 

12"  x  M"  x  2'  5"  or  3"  x  3"  x  %e"  x  10'  6". 

4.  To  avoid  possible  misunderstanding  leading  to  freight 

overcharges,  all  beams  or  channels  listed  on  any 
shipping  bill  form  (D  61,  D  66,  D  62)  should  have 
the  dimensions  listed  thus:  20"  x  1"  x  24'  1", 
instead  of  20"  x  80  Ib.  x  24'  1",  although  such  bills 
in  so  far  as  they  act  as  shop  bills  should  read 
20"  x  80  Ib.  x  24'  1". 

5.  For  pieces  that  will  be  bundled  or  nested,  the  dimen- 

sions of  individual  pieces  should  be  given.  Shipping 
clerk  will  note  that  pieces  are  bundled,  and  give  on 
shipping  statement  extreme  dimensions  of  bundle. 

6.  The  shipping  bills  should  cover  all  material  on  the 

contract.  For  auxiliary  material  furnished  by  other 
departments,  and  that  which  cannot  be  listed  in 
detail,  reference  should  be  made  to  drawings, 
orders,  etc.,  covering  this  material,  stating  by  whom 
it  is  furnished. 

For  Preparation  of  Shipping  Bills,  see  pages   74.1  to 
75.5. 


EXPORT   WORK  127 

Shipping  Bill  Prints  for  Export  Company 

1.  Shipping   bills   for   export   work   should   be   sent   to 

Invoice  Department,  United  States  Steel  Products 
Company,  at  the  same  time  drawings  and  bills  are 
sent  to  shop.  If  bills  are  revised  in  any  way,  prints 
showing  revision  should  be  sent  at  once. 

Drawings  for  File  and  Use  in  Erection 

2.  Drawings  for  file  and  use  in  erection  should  not  be 

sent  until  notice  of  shipment  is  received  from  the 
Plant  Manager.  Revisions  that  are  found  neces- 
sary, during  fabrication,  should  be  recorded  on  all 
tracings.  For  large  orders  this  feature  should  be 
given  special  consideration. 


Duplicate  Tracings  and  Van  Dykes 

3.  Reproduced  tracings  or  Van  Dykes  should  be  retained 

by  the  drawing  room  in  cases  where  customer 
requires  original  tracings.  This  does  not  apply  to 
old  tracings  that  are  sent  to  the  purchaser  to  give 
more  space  in  the  filing  room. 

Correspondence 

4.  In  dealing  directly  with  the  customer  or  engineer, 

copies  of  all  correspondence  must  be  sent  to  Bridge 
Department,  United  States  Steel  Products  Com- 
pany. 


128  MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS 

CHAPTER  X 

MISCELLANEOUS    INSTRUCTIONS 
CAMBER 

RAILROAD  SPANS  OVER  200  FEET  AND  HIGHWAY 
SPANS  OVER  250  FEET 

1.  For  railroad  spans  over  200  feet,  and  highway  spans 

over  250  feet,  the  distortion  due  to  dead  and  live 
load  should  be  computed,  and  length  of  all  members 
modified  so  that  lengths  will  be  normal  under  these 
loads.  The  live  load  stress  due  to  a  uniform  live 
load  over  the  full  length  of  span  and  not  the  maxi- 
mum live  load  stress  should  be  used.  This  uniform 
load  should  be  such  as  would  produce  the  same 
live  load  stress  in  center  chords  as  given  on  stress 
sheet.  Find  the  ratio  between  the  sum  of  the  dead 
and  live  load  stress,  and  dead  load  stress  in  the 
center  chords.  DI^L  Multiply  the  dead  load 
stress  in  each  member  by  this  ratio  and  find  the 
distortion  in  length  due  to  this  stress.  The  normal 
lengths  of  the  members  should  be  figured,  and  for 
compression  members  should  be  increased,  and 
for  tension  members  decreased  by  an  amount  equal 

2.  to    the    distortion.     The    lengths    should    also    be 
corrected  for  play  in  pin  holes.     The  camber  of  the 
truss  resulting  from  the  above  changes  in  length 
and  the  pin  play  can  be  found  graphically  by  what 
is  known  as  a  Williot  Diagram. 


3.  If  a  given  amount  of  camber  is  to  remain  in  the  truss 
under  dead  and  live  load,  the  change  in  length  of 
truss  members  from  the  normal,  as  outlined  above, 
should  be  increased  in  the  proportion  that  the 
camber  under  dead  and  live  load  stress  has  to 
deflection  at  center  due  to  dead  and  live  load. 


4.     In    figuring    distortions,  impact    stresses    should    be 
neglected. 


MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS  129 

CAMBER 

RAILROAD  TRUSS  SPANS  UP  TO  200  FEET  AND  HIGHWAY 
TRUSS  SPANS  UP  TO  250  FEET 

Railroad 

1.  For  railroad  spans,  up  -to  and  including  200  feet, 
trusses  should  be  cambered  by  increasing  the 
top  chord  length  J/g  mcn  for  each  10  feet  in  length, 
unless  specifications  state  that  camber  shall  be 
made  a  proportional  part  of  span.  If  the  specifica- 
tions give  either  the  rate  of  top  chord  increase  or 
the  camber,  the  camber  corresponding  to  the  top 
chord  increase,  or  the  top  chord  increase  correspond- 
ing to  the  camber,  can  be  found  from  the  equation 
E=-^^L  in  which  E  =  panel  increase  in  inches, 
C  =  camber  in  inches,  H= depth  of  truss  in  feet, 
S= length  of  span  in  feet,  N  =  number  of  panels. 
The  above  equation  is  derived  from  the  equation 
of  a  circle,  the  posts  being  considered  as  radial. 


Highway 

2.  For  highway  spans  up  to  and  including  250  feet,  the 
top  chord  lengths  should  be  increased  ylQ  inch 
for  each  10  feet  in  length,  unless  specifications  give 
some  other  amount  or  method  of  obtaining 
camber. 


Curved  Top  Chord  Trusses 

3.  When  trusses  have  varying  depths,  the  panel  increase 
as  determined  above  is  to  be  considered  the  panel 
increase  at  the  center  of  the  span  and  the  increase 
in  top  chord  panel  length  for  any  panel  should 
have  the  same  proportion  to  the  panel  increase  at 
the  center  of  the  span,  as  the  height  of  the  truss  at 
the  center  of  the  panel  in  question  has  to  the  height 
of  the  truss  at  the  center  of  the  span. 


ISO  MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS 

CAMBER 

RAILROAD  TRUSS  SPANS  UP  TO  200  FEET  AND  HIGHWAY 

TRUSS  SPANS  UP  TO  250  FEET 
Diagonals 

1.  The  lengths  of  all  truss  diagonals  and  end  posts  are 

to  be  computed,  assuming  each  panel  of  the  truss 
to  be  a  true  geometrical  figure  with  the  full  panel 
camber  increase  added  to  the  normal  panel  length 
of  the  top  chord.  For  compression  members  of  a 
pin  connected  truss,  the  length  center  to  center  of 
pin  holes  is  to  be  the  exact  computed  length,  but 
for  tension  members  yS2  inch  should  be  deducted 
from  the  computed  length  as  a  correction  for  play 
in  the  pin  holes.  In  the  center  panel  of  a  riveted 
truss,  both  diagonals  should  have  their  computed 
cambered  length  reduced  ^ie  inch  for  draw. 

Deck  Bridges 

2.  For  deck  bridges  with  vertical  end  posts,  the  length  of 

end  panel  of  floor  and  top  chords  should  be  reduced 
by  one-half  the  top  chord  increase  between  the 
center  of  truss  and  panel  point  Ul.  In  figuring 
length  of  stringers  for  deck  spans,  add  one-half  of 
panel  increase  to  normal  panel  length,  and  consider 
this  the  distance  center  to  center  of  floor  beams. 
In  figuring  top  laterals  for  deck  or  through  bridges, 
the  full  panel  increase  should  be  used,  and  usual 
draw  (see  page  114.1)  deducted  from  calculated 
length  of  diagonal. 

CAMBER  DIAGRAM 

3.  A  camber  diagram  giving  the  ordinate  at  each  panel 

point  of  the  bottom  chord  from  the  horizontal  to 
the  "no  load"  line  should  be  placed  on  the  erection 
plan  of  all  truss  spans  for  export  and  for  all  spans 
of  250  feet  or  more. 

PLATE  GIRDER  SPANS 

4.  No  camber  is  to  be  used  in  plate  girder  spans  unless 

required  by  customer.  If  camber  is  required,  it 
is  to  be  taken  care  of  in  such  a  way  as  to  satisfy 
the  customer  and  as  best  suits  the  plant  where  the 
work  is  fabricated. 


MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS  131 

CAMBER 
.     ROOF  TRUSSES 

1.  Roof  trusses  having  spans  of  75  feet  or  under   should 

not  be  cambered.  The  deflection  of  trusses  should 
be  considered  when  a  definite  clearance  must  be 
maintained  for  crane  or  other  purposes,  also  when 
wall  or  other  framing  is  attached  to  lower  chord. 
Trusses  over  75  feet  span  may  be  cambered  v  hen 
considered  necessary  by  Plant  Engineer,  the  amount 
of  camber  being  approximately  equal  to  the  deflec- 
tion of  truss  under  full  load.  For  parallel  chord  or 
flat  pitch  trusses,  camber  produced  by  lengthening 
top  chord  y%  inch  in  10  feet  will  approximately 
equal  deflection  under  full  load.  Fink  or  other 

2.  steep  pitch  trusses,  if  cambered  at  all,  should  be 
cambered   by   method   of   theoretical  deformation. 
When  roof  trusses  are  cambered,  the  girts,  bracing, 
etc.,  are  figured  on  the  assumption  that  the  truss 
is  fully  loaded. 

SHOP  RIVET  PERCENTAGES 

3.  For  estimating  weight  of  shop  rivets,  use  the  following 

percentages  of  the  ordered  weight  of  material;  not 
including  the  weight  of  steel  joists  in  highway 
bridges  nor  the  weight  of  corrugated  sheeting  in 
mill  buildings. 

Highway  Bridges 

4.  Through  pin  connected  spans,  with  built 

floor  beams,  100  ft.  and  under 3  per  cent. 

Through  pin  connected  spans,  with  built 

floor  beams,  over  100  ft 3%  per  cent. 

Through  pin  connected  spans,  with 

rolled  floor  beams,  100  ft.  and  under.  .27/io  per  cent. 
Through  pin  connected  spans,  with 

rolled  floor  beams,  over  100  ft 3  per  cent. 

Deck  riveted  spans,  with  T-chords,  100 

ft.  and  under 4^  per  cent. 

Riveted  pony  truss  spans,  with  box 

chords,  80  ft.  and  under 6J^  per  cent. 

Riveted  pony  truss  spans,  with  T-chords, 

rolled  beams  80  ft.  and  over 3  per  cent. 

Deck  plate  girder  spans 5  per  cent. 

Through  plate  girder  spans 6  per  cent. 


132  MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS 

SHOP  RIVET  PERCENTAGES 

Railroad  Bridges 

1.  Single  track  deck  plate  girder  spans 6      per  cent. 

Single  track  through  plate  girder  spans.. 5J/£  per  cent. 
Double  track  through  plate  girder  spans. .  5      per  cent. 

Single  track  through  riveted  spans 6      per  cent. 

Double  track  through  riveted  spans 4      per  cent. 

Single  track  through  pin  connected  spans. 4J/2  per  cent. 
Double    track    through    pin    connected 

spans 3^  per  cent. 

Single  track  deck  riveted  spans 7      per  cent. 

Double  track  deck  riveted  spans 6      per  cent. 

Single  track  deck  pin  connected  spans..  .5  per  cent. 
Double  track  deck  pin  connected  spans.  .48/io  per  cent. 
Single  track  viaducts  with  stiff  bracing.  .5^  per  cent. 
Double  track  viaducts  with  stiff  bracing.  .48Ao  per  cent. 
Trough  floor 7  to  10  per  cent. 

Mill  Buildings 

2.  Light,  roof    construction    and   light  mill 

buildings  without  crane  runways 3  per  cent. 

Light  mill  buildings,  with  crane  runways. 4  per  cent. 
Heavy  mill  buildings,  with  crane  runways  4J/2  per  cent. 
Extra  heavy  mill  buildings,  with  crane 

runways 5      per  cent. 

Office  Buildings 

3.  Riveted  work , ; .-,.  <  K; -tv; *; 3  to  4  per  cent. 

Beams Y^    of    1  per  cent. 


RAILWAY  SHIPMENTS 

Shipping  Height 

4.     Nearly  all  railroads  can  handle  pieces  at  least  10' 

high  (except  pieces  too  long  for  a  single  car,  when 
thickness  of  bolster,  12"  to  15",  must  be  included) 
and  &  0"  wide,  or  10'  3"  wide  and  7'  3"  high. 
In  detailing  pieces  approaching  these  dimensions, 
Traffic  Department  should  be  consulted.  Informa- 
tion required  from  Traffic  Department  should  be^ 
obtained  through  Plant  Manager's  office. 


MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS 

RAILWAY  SHIPMENTS 


133 


Shipping  Lengths 

1.  Ordinary  gondola  and  flat  cars  are  from  34'  to  40' 
long.  Care  should  be  taken  to  detail  light  pieces 
for  single  car  shipment  not  more  than  40'  long. 


Shipping  Weights 

2.  Pieces  exceeding  22'  in  length,  or  too  wide  to  be 
loaded  through  the  side  door  of  a  standard  36'  box 
car,  should  be  detailed  so  that  they  can  be  loaded 
on  gondolas  or  flats.  They  can  then  be  shipped  in 
less  than  car  load  lots  (first  class  rate).  The  mini- 
mum weights  for  which  freight  charges  will  be 
figured  at  either  car  load  or  less  than  car  load  rates 
are  indicated  in  the  following  table. 


1 

as 

t 

Pacific  Coast 
States 
Classification. 

w 

Less  car  load  lots  
Min.  car  load,  bridge  iron.  . 
Min.   car  load,   girders  and 
roof  trusses  
Min.   load  pieces  requiring 
two  cars  

1,000 
36,000 

30,000 
45,000 

5,000 
36,000 

36,000 
45,000 

5,000 
40,000 

40,000 
60,000 

.  4,000 
30,000 

30,000 
45,000 

.     Min.   load  pieces  requiring 
three  cars  

60,000 

60,000 

80,000 

60,000 

Min.   load  pieces  requiring 
four  cars  

75,000 

75,000 

When  more  than  four  cars  (three  cars  Western  Classi- 
fication) are  used,  the  additional  car  or  cars  are 
considered  as  a  new  series;  the  series  being  deter- 
mined by  number  of  cars  over  which  a  continuous 
load  extends. 


134  MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS 

MASONRY  PLANS,  MASONRY,  ANCHOR  BOLTS 

1.  On  all  work  requiring   anchor  bolts  to   be  built   in 

the  masonry,  a  masonry  plan  should  be  furnished, 
showing  exact  location  of  bolts.     The  masonry  plan 
should  also  show: 
Relative  elevations  of  all  bridge  seats  or  column 

footings. 
Distance  center  to    center  of    piers    and    face    to 

face  of  back  walls. 
Distance  from  bridge   seat   or   column   footing   to 

base  of  rail  or  floor  level. 

Projection  of  anchor  bolts  above  top  of  masonry. 
The  size  of  the  steel  base  plates. 

2.  On  all    work    designed    by    the    American    Bridge 

Company  masonry  plans  should  give  the  column 
loads. 

3.  Plan  should  bear  a  note  stating  who  furnishes   and 

who  sets  the  anchor  bolts. 

4.  No  attempt  should  be  made  to  design  masonry  or  to 

show  actual  dimensions  of  same. 

5.  Unless  otherwise  guided  by  specifications  or  building 

laws,  the  following  bearing  values  should  be  used: 
Brick  laid  in  lime  and  cement . . .  150  Ib.  per  sq.  in. 

Brick  laid  in  cement 300  Ib.  per  sq.  in. 

Limestone  or  bluestone 450  Ib.  per  sq.  in. 

Granite 600  Ib.  per  sq.  in. 

Concrete  (1-2-4  mix  Portland 

Cement) 600  Ib.  per  sq.  in. 

On  concrete  which  is  known  to  be  of  the 
foregoing  proportions  and  sufficiently  aged 
(as  is  usual  in  bridge  piers  and  abutments), 
600  Ib.  per  sq.  in.  is  a  safe  value.  But  on 
leaner  mixtures  of  concrete  or  when  definite 
information  as  to  its  condition  is  not  avail- 
able use  350  Ib.  per  sq.  in. 

6.  Anchor  bolts  built  in  masonry  should  not    be    less 

than  1  inch  in  diameter  and  should  project  into 
concrete  not  less  than  3  feet. 

7.  Rough   bolts  for  bridge  work    placed   after  steel  is 

set  should  be  not  less  than   %  inch  in   diameter, 
nor  project  less  than  8  inches  in  masonry. 


MISCELLANEOUS   INSTRUCTIONS  136 

FLOOR  PLANS 

1.  The  points  of  the  compass  should  be  given. 

2.  Except  for  very  simple  framing  the  elevation  of  each 

beam  should  be  given  in  parentheses  (+   or  - 
distance  from  floor  line) . 

3.  No  ditto  signs   are  to  be  used  on  floor  plans.     All 

sizes  and  elevations  should  be  repeated. 

4.  All  information  should  be  given  for  attachment  of 

auxiliary  work,  so  that  detailers  and  checkers  will 
not  be  obliged  to  consult  architectural  plans  for 
this  information. 

5.  In  the  general  notes  state  which  field  connections  are 

riveted  and  which  are  bolted;  note  diameter  of 
rivets  and  other  similar  information  for  the  use  of 
the  erector. 


GROUTING  UNDER  CASTINGS 

6.  Grouting  is  usually  provided  under  cast  bases,  resting 
on  stone  caps  or  grillage  beams,  when  the  pressure 
per  square  foot  is  35  tons  or  less.  When  pressure 
is  greater  than  35  tons  tper  square  foot,  bases  must 
be  planed  on  bottom  for  direct  bearing.  When 
grouting  is  used,  an  allowance  of  not  less  than  %  inch 
must  be  made  between  base  and  grillage,  and  cast 
bases  need  not  be  planed  on  bottom. 


CRANE  CLEARANCE  DIAGRAM 

7.  A  diagram  showing  actual  crane  clearances  should  be 
sent  as  soon  as  possible  to  the  Customer  for  his 
approval. 


136 


MISCELLANEOUS   INSTRUCTIONS 
SMALL  COLD=DRIVEN  RIVETS 


1.  Rivets  which  are  to  be  driven  cold  should  be  of  BB 

iron. 

2.  Flat  heads  are  preferable,  as  small  round  head  rivets 

with  short  grips  tend  to  turn  over  in  driving. 

3.  The  driven  head  should  if  possible  be  flat  as  flat  heads 

cost  less  than  round  heads. 

LENGTHS  FOR  COLD-DRIVEN  RIVETS 
USE  FLAT  HEAD  RIVETS  WHERE  POSSIBLE 


4. 


%"  RIVETS 

%a"  RIVETS 

Grip 

Round  Head 

Mat  Head 

Round  Head 

Mat  Head 

W 

y*f 

Y*' 

Y*' 

Ys 

%' 

5Af 

%' 

%' 

w 

W 

a/' 

Vi' 

i" 

W 

l" 

%' 

5A' 

\\/^' 

\y^' 

1" 

m 

\y±' 

iy%' 

\y%' 

w 

m 

m 

\y<i 

iw 

m* 

m 

m 

11/2/1 

CORRUGATED  AND  FLAT  SHEET  STEEL       137 

CHAPTER  XI 
CORRUGATED  AND  FLAT  SHEET   STEEL 

Gauges 

1.  The  U.  S.  Government  standard  thicknesses  and 
weights  for  black  flat  sheets  of  IRON,  as  fixed  by 
Act  of  Congress,  March  3,  1903,  is  given  in  Table  I. 
The  weights  of  STEEL  sheeting  furnished  by  the 
American  Sheet  &  Tin  Plate  Company  are  given 
in  Table  II. 


TABLE  I. 

TABLE  II. 

U.  S.  Government 

FLAT  STEEL  SHEETS 

COR.  STEEL  SHEETS 

Standard 

Weight  per  square  foot 

Weight  per  square  foot 

a« 

Q 

Q 

.3 

§  •** 

w                       §  "*-* 

Prl 

O 

P 

|| 

i 

| 

|j| 

1 

H 

E£ 

~ 

o 

H-l 

O 

10 

.1406 

5.625 

5.645 

5.785 

12 

.1093 

4.375 

4.395 

4.535 

14 

.0781 

3.125 

3.145 

3.285 

16 

.0625           2.5 

2.52 

2.66 

2.71 

2.86 

18 

.0500 

2.0 

2.02 

2.16 

2.17 

2.32 

20 

.0375 

1.5 

1.52 

1.66 

1.63 

1.78 

22 

.0312 

1.25 

1.27 

1.41 

1.36 

1.51 

24 

.0250 

1.00 

1.02 

1.16 

1.10 

1.24 

26 

.01875 

.75 

.77 

.91 

.83 

.98 

28 

.0156 

.625 

.65 

.785 

.68 

.85 

Roofing  and  Siding 

2.  Roofing  is  made  from  flat  sheets  30  in.  wide,  each 
having  103/2  corrugations  2%  in.  wide  by  Y%  in. 
deep,  one  edge  of  sheet  turning  up  and  the  other 
turning  down.  The  sheets  after  corrugating  are 
27^  in.  wide.  They  are  laid  with  a  side  lap  of  1^ 
corrugations  and  cover  approximately  24^in.  net 
width. 

Sheet  27^"  wide 


138  CORRUGATED   AND    FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 

4 

Roofing  and  Siding — Continued 

1.  Siding  is  made  from  flat  sheets  28  in.  wide,  each 
having  10  corrugations  2^§  in.  wide  by  ^  m-  deep, 
with  both  edges  of  sheet  turning  the  same  way. 
The  sheets  after  corrugating  are  26  in.  wide.  They 
are  laid  with  a  side  lap  of  one  corrugation  and 
cover  approximately  24  in.  net  width. 


Sheet  26"  wide 


Corrugated  sheeting  with  3  in.  corrugations  is  some- 
times specified.  This  is  rolled  in  sheets  26  in.  full 
width,  covering  approximately  24  in.  net  when 
lapped  one  corrugation.  The  corrugations  are 
about  %  in.  deep.  The  sheets  are  corrugated  with 
both  edges  turning  the  same  way. 

Sheets  should  have  an  end  lap  of  not  less  than  6  in. 
for  roofing  and  not  less  than  4  in.  for  siding. 

For  siding  it  is  customary  to  specify  two  gauges 
lighter  than  for  roofing.  Thus :  if  No.  20  is  used  for 
roofing,  No.  22  is  generally  used  for  siding. 

Standard  widths  for  corrugated  sheeting  should  be 
ordered,  and  standard  lengths  as  far  as  practicable. 
Table  of  Standard  and  Stock  sizes  on  page  150. 
When  sizes  of  sheets  are  affected  by  window  and 
door  openings,  skylights,  stacks,  etc.,  requiring 
widths  and  lengths  not  standard,  order  standard 
sheets  to  be  cut  in  the  field,  unless  sheets  of  special 
length  occur  in  large  numbers,  in  which  case  order 
sheets  exact  length.  In  considering  field  cutting, 
bear  in  mind  that  short  sheets  more  than  20  in. 
long,  that  are  ordered  in  multiple  lengths,  can  only 
be  cut  by  hand;  20  in.  being  the  maximum  cut 
possible  with  the  machine  usually  at  hand  for  field 
cutting. 


CORRUGATED  AND  FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 


139 


Roofing  and  Siding — Continued 


1. 


When  ordering  sheets  for  gable  ends,  order  one  sheet 
to  cut  into  two  pieces,  thus  saving  all  waste  and 
also  an  extra  cut. 


Ends  from  long 
sheets  used  here. 


Order  four 
long  sheets. 


2.  Sheets  should  splice  with  end  laps  over  purlins  or 

girts. 

3.  In  ordering  corrugated  sheeting,  use  net  widths  given 

above  and  add  2  per  cent. 

Birmingham  Wire  Gauge 

4.  Sheet  steel  can  be  rolled  to  Birmingham  Wire  Gauge 

if  specified.     For  extra  charge,  see  page  152.3. 

Corrugated  Iron 

5.  Corrugated  iron  is  rolled  by  very  few  mills.     It  should 

not  be  specified,  except  when  absolutely  necessary. 
When  specified,  orders  must  state  very  clearly  that 
iron,  not  steel,  is  wanted. 

Copper  Bearing  Sheet  Steel 

6.  Sheet  steel  containing  a  small  percentage  of  copper 

can  now  be  obtained.  These  sheets  are  rolled  to 
the  same  sizes  as  given  for  ordinary  steel  sheets. 
When  required,  specify  "  American  Sheet  and  Tin 
Plate  Co.;s  Copper  Bearing  Keystone  Sheets." 

Spacing  of  Supports  for  Different  Gauges 

GAUGE  ROOF  SIDES 

7.  Nos.  18  and  20  Not  over  5'  9"  Not  over  7'    8" 
No.    22  "       "      4'  9"  "       "     6'    8" 
No.    24  "       "     3'  9"  "       "     5'    8" 
No.    26  "       "     2'  9"  "       "     3'  10" 

8.  Purlins  and  girts  should  be  so  arranged  that  sheets 

span  two  spaces.  In  all  cases  purlins  and  girts 
should  be  perpendicular  to  the  run  of  corrugations. 


14O  CORRUGATED   AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 

Billing  Corrugated  Steel    - 

1.  Corrugated  sheeting  is  billed   on    Form    D59.     The 

columns  showing  gauge,  width,  etc.,  black  or 
galvanized,  roofing  or  siding,  should  be  properly 
filled  out.  (See  page  46.3.) 

FASTENINGS  FOR  CORRUGATED  STEEL 

2.  Galvanized  steel  fastenings  are  usually  more  readily 

obtained  than  black  fastenings.  Consequently, 
unless  black  fastenings  are  carried  in  stock  at  the 
fabricating  plant,  galvanized  fastenings  should  be 
furnished  with  all  corrugated  iron  or  steel,  black 
or  galvanized,  except  for  very  large  orders  when  the 
material  in  the  fastenings  should  be  the  same  as  in 
the  sheeting. 

3.  Fastenings  should  be  billed  on  a  separate  sheet;  use 

Form  D59. 

4.  Corrugated  steel  should  usually  be  fastened  to  girts 

and  purlins  by  one  of  the  following  methods. 

Straps 

5.  Straps  are  to  be  used  for  attaching  the  corrugated 

sheets  to  purlins  and  to  girts  made  of  I-beams, 
channels  or  Z  bars,  and,  if  specified,  to  angle  girts. 

6.  Straps  are  made  of  No.  20  gauge  steel  %  in.  wide. 

They  pass  around  the  girts  or  purlins  and  are 
attached  at  both  .ends  by  closing  rivets. 

7.  Table  of  lengths  of  straps  required  for  channel  purlins 

of  the  following  sizes: 

Size  of  Purlin 5"     6"     1"     8"     9"  10"  12" 

Length  of  Strap....  15"  17"  19"  22"  24"  26"  31" 

8.  Order  one  strap  and  two  rivets  for  each  lineal  foot  of 

girt  or  purlin  to  which  the  sheeting  is  to  be  fastened, 
and  add  20  per  cent,  to  the  number  of  rivets  and  10 
per  cent,  to  the  number  of  straps.  Straps  should 
be  ordered  in  bundles  to  be  cut  and  bent  in  the 
field.  One  bundle  weighs  50  pounds  and  contains 
400  lineal  feet.  For  weight  of  rivets,  see  table, 
page  142.1 


CORRUGATED  AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL  .  141 

FASTENINGS  FOR  CORRUGATED  STEEL 

Clinch  Rivets 

(Called  " Steel  Roofing  Fasteners"  by  American  Steel 
&  Wire  Co.) 

1.  Clinch  rivets  are  to  be  used  for  attaching  the  corru- 

gated sheets  to  angle  girts.  The  angles  should  be 
arranged  with  their  backs  turned  up  and  out  to 
take  the  bearing  of  the  sheeting  and  of  the  clinch 
rivets. 

2.  These  rivets  are  made  of  No.  10  wire,  and  have  heads 

curved  to  fit  the  corrugations.  They  pass  through 
the  sheeting  and  clinch  around  the  outstanding 
legs  of  the  angles.  They  should  be  of  sufficient 
lengths  to  allow  1  inch  or  more  of  the  rivet  beyond 
the  bend. 

3.  Clinch  rivets  are  of  the  following  lengths  and  weights: 

(Weights  are  for  galvanized  rivets.) 


O.  S.  Leg  of  Angle 

2" 

2^"-3" 

3^"-4" 

5" 

6" 

Length  of  Rivet 

4" 

5" 

6" 

7" 
1$6 

8" 

9" 

~2Q 

10" 

~W 

ii" 

^6 

12" 
~ZL 

Number  per  Pound 

62 

50 

39 

34 

4.  Order  one  rivet  for  every  lineal  8  inch  of  girt  to  which 

sheeting  is  fastened  and  add  10  per  cent. 

Clips  and  Bolts 

5.  Clips   and   bolts   are   to   be   used   for   clamping  the 

corrugated  sheets  to  channels,  I-beams,  Z-bars  or 
angle  girts.  These  fastenings  are  not  as  desirable 
as  the  other  fastenings  and  should  only  be  used  in 
special  cases  where  the  other  fastenings  cannot  be 
applied.  As  a  rule  they  are  used  only  at  the  tops 
and  bottoms  of  windows,  tops  of  doors,  etc. 

6.  Clips  are  made  of  No.  16  gauge    steel   1J^  in.  wide 
.     by  2j/£  in.   long,   and   are  slightly   crimped  to  fit 

the  flanges  of  the  girts.  The  bolts  are  of  No.  10 
wire,  with  curved  heads,  and  should  be  specified 
1  inch  long,  except  for  special  cases.  They  are 
furnished  with  the  clips,  one  for  each  clip.  Call 
for  the  required  number  of  clips  "with  bolts  1 
inch  long." 

7.  Order  one  clip  and  bolt  for  each  lineal  8  inch  of  girt 

to  which  sheeting  is  to  be  attached  and  add  10 
per  cent. 


142     t  CORRUGATED   AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 

FASTENINGS  FOR  CORRUGATED  STEEL 
Closing  Rivets 

1.  Closing  rivets  besides  being  used  for  fastening  straps 

are  used  for  fastening  the  side  laps,  flashing,  ridge 
roll,  etc.  They  are  3/ie  in.  diameter  and  of  the 
following  lengths: 

(Weights  are  for  galvanized  rivets.) 

Length y8"       Y2"       Y%"       %" 

No.  per  Ib 200       166       142       125 

2.  Rivets  Y%  m-  l°ng  are  sufficient  for  a  grip  of  three 

thicknesses  of  sheeting.  A  few  rivets  Y^  in.  long 
should  be  ordered  for  grips  of  more  than  three 
thicknesses. 

3.  For  side  laps  order  one  rivet  for  each  lineal  16  inches 

of  roofing  and  for  each  lineal  24  inches  of  siding. 

4.  For  each  lineal  6  inches  of  side  lap  of  ridge  roll,  flashing, 

cornice,  etc.,  order  one  rivet.  Add  20  per  cent  in 
all  cases  for  waste. 


Nails 

5.  " Corrugated  Steel  Nails"   are  a  special  kind  with 

heads  curved  to  fit  the  corrugations.  They  are  to 
be  used  for  fastening  corrugated  sheeting  to  wooden 
sheathing  or  nailing  strips  on  girts  and  purlins. 
American  Steel  &  Wire  Co.'s  " Clinch  Nails"  may 
be  used  when  " Corrugated  Steel  Nails"  cannot 
be  obtained. 

6.  When  sheeting  is  to  be  attached  to  wooden  girts, 

purlins,  or  spiking  pieces,  one  nail  for  each  lineal 
foot  of  girt  or  purlin  should  be  ordered.  Nails 
should  be  3  inches  long  for  roofing  and  2^  inches 
long  for  siding. 

7.  Where  sheeting  is  to  be  fastened  to  wooden  sheathing, 

order  nails  spaced  1  foot  apart  for  end  and  side 
laps,  and  also  in  the  body  of  the  sheets  in  lines 
3  or  4  feet  apart,  the  same  as  if  girts  or  purlins 
occurred  on  these  lines. 


CORRUGATED   AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL  143 

FASTENINGS  FOR  CORRUGATED  STEEL 

Nails  —  Continued 

1.     Order  nails  2  inches  long  for  1  inch  sheathing  and  2J/2 

inches  long  for  1J^  inch  and  thicker  sheathing. 
The  following  table  gives  the  weights  of  galvanized 
"Corrugated  Steel  Nails." 


•2.         Length..  .   1^"       2"     2^" 

No.  per  lb..  .....   150       139       111  83 

3.  For  fastening  flashing  to  wood,  use  "Barbed  Roofing 

Nails"  1J4  inch  long.     Order  one  nail  for  each  lineal 

6  inches. 

Add  20  per  cent  in  all  cases  for  nails. 

SIZES  AND  WEIGHTS  OF  BARBED  ROOFING  NAILS 

4.  (These  nails  are  designated  by  length   and   not  by 

"penny.") 

Length  .............  M"  7/8"  1"  W 

No.  per  lb  ..........  714  469  411  365 

Length  .............  IK"  l%"  W  W 

No.  per  lb  .......  .  ,  .  251  230  176  151 


Stove  Bolts 

5.  Round  head  stove  bolts  have  button  heads  with  slot 

for  screw  driver.     The  nuts  are  square.     Order  by 

number. 

Add  5  per  cent,  plus  5  to  net  number  required. 

Louvre  Bolts 

6.  Round  head  stove  bolts  J^  in.   diameter  by  1  inch 

long  should  be  provided  for  assembling  louvres. 

Finish  at  Door  Jambs 

7.  Corrugated    sheeting    should    be    attached    to    door 

jambs  by  y±  in.  diameter  round  head  stove  bolts, 
spaced  1'  0"  c-c.  Provide  a  1^  in.  x  J/g  in.  gal- 
vanized bar  for  the  outside  finish.  This  should  be 
detailed  on  Form  D58.  Also  furnish  1)^  in.  x  j/g 
in.  washers  to  be  used  under  the  nuts  on  the  inside, 
so  that  special  punching  in  the  structural  steel 
framing  will  not  be  required. 


146  CORRUGATED   AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 

Corrugated  Steel  Arches 

1 .  The  arches  are  made  from  standard  26  inch  wide  sheets. 

A  side  lap  of  one  corrugation  is  used,  each  sheet 
covering  24  inches  net  width.  The  side  laps  should 
be  riveted  with  3/i6  inch  rivets  12  inches  apart. 

2.  The  gauges  ordinarily  used  are  No.  16,  18  and  20. 

3.  When  possible,  standard  lengths  of  sheets  are  to  be 

used.  This  can  often  be  accomplished  by  varying 
slightly  the  rise,  the  span  or  the  center  distance  of 
beams,  if  any  of  these  variations  are  permissible. 

4.  In  ordering,  bill  on  Form  D59  and  give  number  of 

sheets  required,  gauge,  black  or  galvanized;  also 
sketch  showing  span,  rise,  and  length  of  sheet. 

5.  The  following  approximate  method  of  figuring  the 

length  of  curved  sheets  is  shorter  than  the  exact 
method  and  sufficiently  accurate  for  ordinary  cases. 


S\2 

+  H2 


Length  (about)=2C+?C~S 


Flashing,  Capping,  Cornice,  Ridge  Roll,  Louvres 

6.  These  should  as  far  as  practicable  be  made  of  standard 
sheets.  Sheets  longer  than  96  inches  should  not  be 
used.  Unless  specified  otherwise,  make  louvres  and 
louvre  flashing  No.  22  gauge,  make  ridge  roll  No. 
24  gauge,  or  same  gauge  as  roofing  and  flashing; 
capping,  cornice,  etc.,  same  gauge  as  siding. 


CORRUGATED   AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL  147 

Flashing,  Capping,  Cornice,  Ridge  Roll,  Louvres — 
Continued 

1.  In  ordering  bill  on  Form  D59;   size,  gauges,  lengths 

should  be  given  in  proper  column  and  sketch  should 
be  given  showing  form  required. 

2.  Flashing  with  a  single  bend,  as  per  fig.  147.2, 


FIG.  147.2 

should  be  shipped  flat,  unless  the  conditions  of  the 
contract  require  it  to  be  formed.  But  if  the  part 
bent  up  is  small  as  per  fig.  147.3,  or  if  there  is  more 

3.  than   one  bend,   pieces,  -  J  such  as  louvres, 

FIG.  147.3 

flashing  for  corner  boards,  door  and  window  trim, 
etc.,  should  be  sent  bent  to  shape. 

4.  Allow  end  lap  of  3  inches  for  ridge  roll  and  2  inches 

for  louvres. 

5.  Louvre  bars  should  be  detailed  on   Form   D58.     If 

assigned  to  Contracting  Department  on  Form 
O&E13,  the  detail  should  be  sent  direct  to  that 
department;  if  not  listed  on  O&E13,  they  should 
be  obtained  from  the  Contracting  Department 
through  the  Order  Office  on  a  reassignment  requisi- 
tion (Form  A8).  See  pages  44.2  and  46.4. 

6.  Flashing  and  trim  should  be  sent  galvanized  or  black 

according  as  sheeting  is  sent  galvanized  or  black. 

Valley  Gutters 

7.  Valley   gutters   should    be   made   of   No.    20   gauge 

galvanized  flat  sheet  steel,  unless  specified  otherwise. 
They   should   be   shipped   flat    (not   formed),   but 
-  permission  to  so  ship  them  should  be  obtained  in 
advance  through  the  Plant  Engineer. 

8.  It  is  preferable  to  have  the  gutter  composed  of  a 

succession  of  single  sheets,  but  for  wide  gutters 
s  two  sheets  should  be  joined  together  before  placing 
in  position  on  the  roof.  The  seam  should  run 
longitudinally  in  the  bottom  of  the  gutter.  All 
seams  and  end  laps  should  be  riveted  and  soldered 
and  made  watertight. 


148  CORRUGATED  AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 

Valley  Gutters — Continued 

1.  If  shipped  flat,  these  sheets  should    be    ordered   on 

Form  D59.  Specify  standard  widths  (page  150.2) 
and  8  ft.  lengths  allowing  4  inches  for  end  laps. 

2.  The  erection  diagram  should  clearly  show  by  sketches 

and  notes  the  method  of  assembling  gutters  which 
are  shipped  flat. 

3.  If  gutters  are  not  to  be  shipped  flat,  they  should  be 

ordered  by  sketch  on  Form  D68,  giving  the 
following  information:  gauge  and  kind  of  metal, 
cross  section  and  pitch  of  gutter,  closed  ends,  total 
length  of  continuous  gutter,  size  and  location  of 
conductors.  It  is  not  necessary  to  establish  length 
of  sheets  in  this  case. 


Eave  Gutters 

4.  Eave  gutters  should  be  made  of  No.  20  gauge  gal- 

vanized steel,  unless  otherwise  specified.  They 
should  be  semi-circular  in  form  with  a  roll  on  both 
sides. 

5.  Eave  gutters  should  be  ordered  by  sketch  on  Form 

D68  giving  the  gauge  and  kind  of  metal,  cross 
section  with  sketch  of  hanger,  length  of  continuous 
gutter,  closed  ends,  size  and  location  of  conductors. 
Include  a  sufficient  number  of  hangers  to  support 
the  gutter  at  3  ft.  intervals. 


Conductors 

6.  Conductors  should  be  made  of  No.  22  gauge  galvanized 

steel,  unless  otherwise  specified. 

7.  For  buildings  in  cold  climates,  conductors  6  inches  in 

diameter  and  under  should  be  corrugated  and 
conductors  over  6  inches  should  be  plain.  For 
buildings  in  warm  climates,  all  conductors  may  be 
plain. 

8.  Conductors  should   be   ordered   by  sketch   on  J orm 

D68,  giving  the  following  information:  gauge  and 
kind  of  metal,  whether  corrugated  or  plain,  diameter, 
length,  bends  and  elbows,  and  the  number,  kind 
and  size  of  attachments. 


CORRUGATED   AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL  149 

Conductors — Continued 

1.  Conductors  should  be  attached  to-  the  side  of  the 

building  at  intervals  of  5  or  6  feet.  If  the  walls 
are  of  brick,  specify  the  ordinary  conductor  hooks 
(readily  obtainable  for  round  pipe  of  the  following 
diameters:  2",  3",  4",  5",  6").  If  conductors  are 
to  be  attached  to  corrugated  siding  or  to  steel  work, 
place  a  sketch  on  the  erection  diagram  showing 
a  ^  in.  strap  similar  in  detail  to  the  ordinary 
corrugated  sheet  connection. 

Drawings  and  Bills  for  the  Erector 

2.  The  erector  should  be  supplied  with  an  erection  plan 

and  an  order  bill.  The  erection  plan  should  show 
the  arrangement  of  the  sheets  with  the  flashing 
and  other  details.  This  drawing  should  show  a 
section  of  the  structure  with  the  arrangement  of 
the  supporting  girts  or  purlins  with  the  length  of 
the  sheets  and  the  laps.  On  this  erection  drawing 
should  be  placed  the  complete  bill  of  sheet  metal 
material  required  for  the  structure.  This  bill 
should  show  the  sheeting,  all  the  flashing,  trimmings 
and  fastenings.  Each  item  should  be  located  so 
that  its  position  can  be  easily  determined  by  the 
erector  by  reference  to  this  drawing. 

3.  The  order  bill  should  be  sent  to  the  erector  for  the 

purpose  of  checking  the  quantity  of  material  shipped. 
This  applies  both  to  the  material  ordered  through 
the  Purchasing  Department  from  the  mill  shipped 
direct  to  the  site,  and  to  the  material  shipped  by 
the  plant. 

4.  In   all   special   construction,    full   details   should   be 

shown  on  the  drawings.  This  applies  to  special 
flashing,  skylight  work,  attachments  about  windows 
and  doors,  asbestos  lining,  and  matters  of  this 
nature.  Details  of  this  work  should  not  be  shown 
in  connection  with  the  structural  work  when  it 
can  be  avoided,  but  should  be  placed  on  the  erection 
drawings  or  on  separate  sheets  devoted  only  to 
these  details. 

o.  When  anti-condensation  lining  is  used,  special 
instructions  should  be  furnished  the  erector  for 
laying  same. 


15O  CORRUGATED  AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 

STANDARD  SIZES 

1.  Blue   Annealed    and    American    Bessemer    Flat 

Sheets 

Gauges  No.  10,  12,  14,  16,  18: 

Widths.. .  .24",  26",  28",  30",  36",  42",  48". 
Lengths..  .72",  84",  96",  120". 

Gauges  No.  20,  22,  24,  26,  28: 

Widths.. .  .24",  26",  28",  30",  36". 
Lengths. .  .  72",  84",  96",  120". 

(For  extras,  see  pages  151.1  to  152.4.) 

2.  Galvanized  Flat  Sheets 

Gauges  No.  10,  12,  14,  16,  18,  20,  22,  24,  26,  28: 

Widths.. .  .24",  26",  28",  30",  36". 
Lengths. .  .  72",  84",  96",  120". 

(For  extras,  see  pages  152.1  to  152.4.) 

3.  Black  and  Galvanized  Corrugated  Sheets 

Gauges  No.  18,  20,  22,  24,  26,  28: 

Widths.. .  .26"  and  27^"  (after  corrugating). 
Lengths... 60",    66",    72",    78",    84",    90",    96", 
102",  108",  114",  120",  132",  144". 

(For  extras,  see  pages  152.2  and  152.3) 


STOCK  SIZES 

The  following  sizes  are  generally  carried  in  stock  by 
the  American  Sheet  and  Tin  Plate  Company. 

4.  Flat  Sheets,  Galvanized  and  Black. 

Gauges  No.  20,  22,  24,  26,  28: 

Widths.. .  .24",  26",  28",  30",  36". 
Lengths..  .60",  72",  84",  96",  120". 

5.  Corrugated  Sheets,  Galvanized  and  Black. 

Gauges  No.  20,  22,  24,  26,  28: 

Widths.. .  .26"  (after  corrugating). 
Lengths..  .60",  72",  84",  96",  108",  120". 


CORRUGATED   AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 


151 


1. 


EXTRAS  FOR  SHEET  STEEL 
(!N  FORCE  FEBRUARY  22,  1909) 

Extras  for  Bessemer  Blue  Annealed  Sheets  Flat 
(Not  Galvanized) 


Extras  for  widths 
No.  10,  12,  14,  16. 
No.  10,  12,  14,  16. 
No.  10,  12,  14,  16. 

Extras  for  lengths : 
No.  10,  12,  14,  16. 
No.  10,  12,  14,  16. 
No.  10,  12,  14,  16. 


15"  and  wider No  extra. 

.under  15"  to  12" 5c  per  100  Ib. 

under  12"  to  6" lOc    "     100    " 


.  40"  and  longer No  extra. 

.under  40"  to  30". 5c  per  100  Ib. 

.  under  30"  to  18" lOc    "     100    " 


2.     Extras  for  Flat  Sheets  (Not  Galvanized) 


Extras  for  widths: 

No.  18..... 20"  to  36" No 

No.  18. . .  ? over  36"  to  48" 5c 

No.  18 over  48"  to  54"  (max.)..  .lOc 

No.  18 under  20"  to  12" 5c 

No.  18 under  12"  to  6" lOc 

No.  20,  22,  24,  26,  28. . .  .under  24"  to  12" lOc 

No.  20,  22,  24,  26,  28. . .  .under  12"  to  6" 20c 

...  over  36"  to  44" 15c 

to  48"  (max.)...25c 


No.  20 

No.  20 over  44 

No.  22,  24 over  36"  to  40" 

No.  22,  24 over  40"  to  48" 

No.  26 over  36"  to  40" 

No.  26... over  40"  to  44"  (max.) 

No.  28 over  32"  to  36" 

No.  28...          .. over  36"  to  40' 


20c 

(max. ) . . .  40e 

20c 

40c 

lOc 

(max.)...40c 


extra. 

per  100  Ib. 

a  100  " 

"  100  " 

"  100  " 

"  100  " 

"  100  " 

"  100  " 

"  100  * 

"  100  « 

"  100  " 

"  100  " 

"  100  " 

"  100  " 

"  100  u 


Extras  for  lengths: 

No.  18 48"  to  144" 

No.  18 over  144" 

No.  18 under  48"  to  30". 

No.  18....         .  .under  30"  to  18". 


. . .  .No  extra. 
..  ..lOcper  100  Ib. 
....  5c  "  100  « 
.  .  lOc  "  100  " 


No.  20,  22,  24,  26,  28....  60"  to  132" No  extra. 

No.  20,  22,  24,  26,  28.. .  .over  132"  to  144"  (max.).lOc  per  100  Ib. 

No.  20,  22,  24,  26,  28. ...  under  60"  to  30" lOc  "  100  " 

No.  20,  22,  24,  26,  28.. .  .under  30"  to  18" 20c  "  100  " 


152  CORRUGATED   AND   FLAT  SHEET  STEEL 

1.  Extras  for  Flat  Sheets  (Galvanized) 

Extras  for  widths: 

No.  10,  12,  14 32"  to  40" No  extra. 

No.  10,  12,  14,  16, 

18,  20,  22,  24 under  24"  to  12" lOc  per  100  Ib. 

No.  10,  12,  14,  16, 

18,  20,  22,  24 under  12"  to  9" 20c  "  100  " 

No.  16,  18 32"  to  44" lOc  "  100  " 

No.  16,  18 over  44"  to  48"  (max.).. . 20c  "  100  " 

No.  20 36"  to  40" 20c  "  100  " 

No.  20 over40"to44" 30c  "  100" 

No.  20 over  44"  to  48"  (max.)..  .40c  "  100  " 

No.22,24 36"to40" 20c  «  100" 

No.  22,  24 over40"to44" 40c  "  100" 

No.22,24 over  44"  to  48"  (max.)...  60c  "  100" 

No.26 36"to40" 30c  "  100" 

No.26 over  40"  to  44"  (max.)... 60c  «  100" 

No.26,28 under  24"  to  12" 15c  "  100" 

No.28 over32"to36" lOc  "  100  " 

No.  28 over  36"  to  40"  (max.). .  .50c  «  100  « 

Extras  for  Lengths: 

No.  10  to  28,  inc under  60"  to  30" lOc  per  100  Ib. 

No.  10  to  28,  inc under  30"  to  24" 15c  "  100" 

No.  10  to  28,  inc over  132"  to  144" lOc  "  100  " 

2.  Extras  for  Corrugated  Sheets  (Painted  or  Gal= 

vanized) 

Only  standard  widths  are  used. 

Extras    for    lengths:     Flat    sheet    extras    apply    on 

lengths  over  132  inches  and  under  60  inches  down 

to  36  inches. 

3.  Extras  for  Weights 

In  addition  to  the  above  extras  for  width  and  length, 
all  sizes  not  designated  as  standard  on  page  150, 
are  subject  to  an  extra  charge  of  lOc  per  100  Ib., 
unless  ordered  in  quantities  of  at  least  4,000  Ib.  to 
the  item.  This  includes  intermediate  gauges  and 
gauges  other  than  U.  S.  Standard. 

4.  Extras  for  Shaping  at  the  Mills 

Single  curving      ^                  ^     25c  per  100  Ib. 
Shaping  to  the  following  forms 65c  per  100  Ib. 


LUMBER,    WINDOWS   AND   DOORS  153 


CHAPTER  XII 

LUMBER,  WINDOWS  AND  DOORS 
LUMBER 


General 

1.  The   timbers    mostly   used   in    structural   work    are 

Douglas  fir  in  the  western  states  and  yellow  pine 
(long  leaf,  short  leaf  and  loblolly),  in  the  eastern 
states;  while  spruce,  Norway  and  white  pine, 
hemlock,  oak  and  poplar  are  used  for  certain 
purposes  in  the  localities  where  they  are  readily 
obtainable. 

2.  As  the  rules  for  grading  and  classifying  lumber  are 

changed  from  time  to  time  and  differ  among  the 
several  manufacturers'  associations,  it  is  not  deemed 
advisable  to  publish  them  in  this  book. 

3.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  nominal  sizes  of 

both  rough  and  finished  lumber  do  not  express  the 
true  size  of  the  pieces.  Common  rough  timbers 
are  usually  about  J4  in.  scant  on  each  side,  to 
illustrate:  6"  x  8"  timbers  would  average  5%"  x 
1%"  and  an  overrun  would  not  be  considered 
sufficient  cause  for  rejection.  Surfacing  on  one 
or  both  sides  still  further  reduces  the  size. 

4.  Rough  lumber  cannot  be  obtained  in  definite  sizes 

without  paying  a  prohibitive  price.  In  cases  where 
an  exact  uniform  thickness  is  desired,  specify 
"surfaced  one  side  to  uniform  thickness." 

5.  Before  specifying  the  kind,  grade  or  classification  of 

lumber  on  a  drawing,  the  Plant  Engineer  should  be 
consulted. 


154  LUMBER,    WINDOWS   AND   DOORS 


KINDS  AND  SIZES  OF  LUMBER  TO  ORDER  FOR 
DIFFERENT  PURPOSES 

Roofing 

1.  It  is  the  ordinary  practice  to  use  for  roofing  tongued 

and  grooved  boards  or  plank  1",  iy2" ,  1%" ',  2"  and 
3"  thick,  surfaced  on  one  side  to  uniform  thickness 
and  of  one  width,  between  6  and  10  inches, 
preferably  6  or  8  inches. 

2.  Spruce  bought  in  the  open  market  is  usually  not  kiln 

dried  and  will  shrink.  Kiln  dried  long  leaf  or  short 
leaf  pine  is  preferable.  Thicknesses  of  1  inch  and 
IJi  inches  long  leaf  pine  may  be  bought  for  about 
the  same  cost  as  short  leaf  pine  or  spruce.  If 
kiln  dried,  the  long  leaf  pine  is  better.  For  13/2 
inches  and  thicker,  the  cost  of  long  leaf  pine  is 
greater.  North  Carolina  or  short  leaf  pine  is  used 
extensively  for  sheathing  and  roof  boarding  for 
which  the  No.  3  grade  (Norfolk  Classification)  is 
best  adapted.  The  next  lower  grade  (box  or  so- 
called  roofing)  is  adapted  only  to  the  cheaper  kinds 
of  work. 

3.  It  is  not  advisable  to  specify  boards  over  8  inches 

wide  for  roofing.  Standard  lengths  are  10,  12,  14, 
16  and  18  feet. 


Flooring 

4.  Stock  for  flooring  should  be  thoroughly  kiln  dried  or 

air  dried  and  should  lay  without  waste.  Knots 
must  be  sound  and  tight,  such  as  will  stand  dressing. 

5.  Finished  surface  flooring  should  be  kiln  dried  lumber, 

tongued  and  grooved,  not  over  4  inches  wide,  1  or 
IJi  inches  thick  and  of  one  width.  It  should  be 
laid  diagonally  or  at  right  angles  to  the  sub  floor. 
Riftsawn  yellow  pine,  and  maple  are  commonly 
used.  The  No.  1  and  No.  2  grades  of  North 
Carolina  pine  are  used  for  flooring  and  stepping. 
Random  lengths  are  always  furnished  unless  definite 
length  is  specified,  in  which  case  an  extra  charge 
is  made. 


LUMBER,    WINDOWS  AND   DOORS  155 

KINDS  AND  SIZES  OF  LUMBER  TO  ORDER  FOR 
DIFFERENT  PURPOSES 

Flooring — Continued 

1.  For  sub  floors  in  slow  burning  construction,  plank 

2,  3,  4  and  5  inches  in  thickness  is  used,  tongued 
and  grooved,  and  surfaced  one  side.  Specify  all 
to  be  of  one  width,  usually  6  or  8  inches.  The 
supporting  beams  should  be  spaced  so  that  plank 
of  12,  14,  16,  18,  20  and  24  feet  lengths  can  be  used 
without  cutting  to  waste.  Plank  should  span  at 
least  two  spaces,  thus  affording  three  or  more 
supports.  The  advisable  maximum  length  for  2 
inch  plank  is  20  feet  and  for  3  inch  plank  or  thicker 
is  24  feet.  The  lengths  of  12,  14  and  16  feet 
should  be  adhered  to  when  the  gross  amount 
ordered  is  considerable  or  when  the  lumber  is 
wanted  promptly 

2.  Shims,  spiking  pieces  and  any  lumber  resting  directly 

on  the  surface  of  the  steel  should  be  specified 
"  surfaced  one  side  to  uniform  thickness, "  otherwise 
there  is  no  assurance  that  lumber  of  these*  exact 
dimensions  will  be  obtained. 

Highway  Bridge  Floors 

3.  White  oak  and  long  leaf  yellow  pine  are  generally 

used  for  highway  bridge  floors.  Short  leaf  pine 
is  not  suited  to  this  purpose  and  should  not  be  used 
in  its  natural  state. 

4.  All  floor  plank  should  be  laid  with  the  heart  side  down. 

5.  For  single  thickness  roadway  plank,  the  minimum  is 

3  inches;  the  width  should  be  from  6  to  10  inches. 

6.  If  the  planks  run  longitudinally  or  diagonally,  specify 

random  lengths,  if  the  planks  run  transversely, 
specify  required  length. 

7.  Wheel  guards  should  be  of  the  same  kind  of  wood  as 

the  plank  and  not  less  than  6x4  inches  in  section. 
Except  for  special  cases  random  lengths  are  satis- 
factory. 

8.  If  it  is  important  to  maintain  an  even  thickness, 

spiking  pieces  should  be  specified  "surfaced  one 
side  to  uniform  thickness." 

9.  Sidewalk  planks  should  not  be  less  than  2  inches 

thick  nor  more  than  6  inches  wide  and  should  be 
cut  to  required  length.  Specify  "  surfaced  one  side 
to  uniform  thickness." 


156  LUMBER,   WINDOWS  AND   DOORS 

KINDS  AND  SIZES  OF  LUMBER  TO  ORDER  FOR 
DIFFERENT  PURPOSES 

Railroad  Bridge  Floors 

1.  In  cases  where  the  American  Bridge  Co.  furnishes 

the  timber  for  the  floors  of  railroad  bridges,  the 
purchaser  usually  specifies  the  kind  and  grade  of 
lumber  to  be  used. 

2.  Ties  and  guard  rails  should  be  ordered  cut  to  size  and 

length.  Wedges  for  the  super-elevation  of  outer 
rail  on  curves  should  be  ordered  by  sketch. 

3.  Usually  the  dapping  of  ties  to  fit  the  stringers  is  done 

by  the  erectors  in  the  field. 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  ORDINARY  FACTORY 
WINDOWS  AND  DOORS 

Windows 

4.  All  window  frames  and  sash  are  to  be  built  in  accord- 

ance with  the  detail  drawings  and  dimensions 
shown  thereon.  The  number  and  kinds  to  be  fur- 
nished should  be  specified  on  the  drawings  and 
sketches. 

5.  All  lumber  is  to  be  sound  and  free  from  rot,  shakes,  or 

large,  loose,  black  or  unsound  knots  or  any  imper- 
fections that  will  impair  its  strength  and  durability. 
A  few  small  or  sound  knots  will  be  allowed  in  the 
sash  and  frames,  but  the  muntins  and  sash  bars 
must  be  entirely  free  from  knots.  Window  frames 
are  to  be  of  white  pine,  of  a  quality  to  fulfill  require- 
ments above  specified,  except  the  stiles  and  parting 
strips  of  double  hung  windows,  which  should  be  of 
Georgia  yellow  pine.  Where  white  pine  is  found 
too  high  in  price,  cypress  is  sometimes  admissible 
for  inside  work. 

6.  All  frames  for  windows,  or  continuous  sash,  are  to 

have  the  heads  and  sills  gained  to  receive  the  jambs. 
All  the  separate  pieces  making  a  frame  are  to  be  cut 
to  exact  dimensions,  and  must  be  built  so  that  an 
ordinary  workman  may  nail  them  together  at  the 
building  site.  No  calculating  of  dimensions,  nor 
cutting  or  measuring  is  to  be  done  by  the  workman 
who  puts  together  the  frames. 


LUMBER,   WINDOWS  AND   DOORS  157 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  ORDINARY  FACTORY 
WINDOWS    AND   DOORS 

Windows — Continued 

1.  All  exposed  surfaces  of  frames  are  to  be  dressed  and 

primed  with  pure  white  lead  and  boiled  linseed 
oil,  except  in  the  case  of  double  hung  or  counter- 
balanced windows,  where  the  parting  strips  and 
pulley  stiles  are  to  be  oiled. 

2.  All  window  frames  not  shipped  by  rail,  but  purchased 

locally  and  delivered  at  the  site  should  be  nailed 
together  complete;  if  shipped  by  rail,  they  are  to  be 
shipped  "  knocked  down/'  and  all  strips  and  small 
pieces  should  be  carefully  bundled  for  shipment. 

3.  Window  sash  are  to  be  built  of  white  pine  of  the 

dimensions  shown  on  the  details.  All  sash  are  to 
have  the  lugs  cut  off  the  stiles  and  rails,  and  are 
to  be  jointed  on  the  outside  edges.  All  exposed 
surfaces  are  to  be  dressed  and  primed  lead  color, 
of  pure  white  lead  and  boiled  linseed  oil.  Sash 
should  be  made  to  fit  the  openings  for  which  they 
are  intended,  with  J^  inch  allowance  in  height  and 
width.  The  sash  are  to  be  glazed  with  single 
thickness  or  strength  American  glass,  of  what  is 
commonly  known  as  "No.  2"  or  "A"  quality.  At 
least  8  glaziers'  points  to  a  light  should  be  used, 
and  the  glass  should  be  well  bedded,  sprigged  and 
puttied  in  the  sash.  If  the  lights  are  larger  than 
12  in.  by  14  in.,  the  glass  is  to  be  double  thick 
American  glass,  same  quality  as  foregoing.  All 
sash  are  to  be  primed  before  the  glass  is  put  in 
place.  All  sash  are  to  be  carefully  crated  for  ship- 
ment, and  all  glass  fractured  when  the  sash  are 
received  at  the  building  site,  is  to  be  replaced  by 
the  manufacturer. 

4.  Hardware,  such  as  pulleys,  weights,  chains,  trolleys, 

trunnions  for  swing  sash,  hinges,  catches,  etc., 
which  attach  to  the  windows  or  their  frames,  and 
such  bolts  or  screws  as  are  required  to  fasten  the 
windows  to  the  frame  work  of  the  building  proper, 
are  not  furnished  by  the  window  manufacturer. 
If  included  in  the  contract,  they  must  be  purchased 
separately. 


158  LUMBER,   WINDOWS  AND  DOORS 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  ORDINARY  FACTORY 

WINDOWS    AND  DOORS 
Doors 

1.  All    doors    and    their    frames    are   to   be   built   in 

accordance  with  the  details  and  to  the  dimen- 
sions shown  on  the  drawings  and  sketches. 

2.  All  lumber  is  to  be  sound,  free  from  rot,  shakes,  or 

large,  loose,  black  or  unsound  knots,  or  any  imper- 
fections that  will  impair  its  strength  or  durability. 
A  few  small  or  sound  knots  will  be  allowed. 

3.  Frames  for  doors  are  to  have  the  heads  and  sills 

gained  to  receive  the  jambs.  All  separate  pieces 
making  a  frame  are  to  be  cut  to  exact  dimensions 
and  must  be  built  so  that  an  ordinary  workman 
may  nail  them  together  at  the  building  site.  No 
calculating  of  dimensions,  nor  cutting  or  measuring 
to  be  done  by  the  workman  who  puts  together  the 
frames. 

4.  All  frames  not  shipped  by  rail,  but  purchased  locally 

and  delivered  at  the  building  site,  shall  be  nailed 
together  complete.  If  shipped  by  rail,  they  are  to 
be  shipped  "knocked  down,"  and  all  strips  and 
small  pieces  should  be  carefully  bundled  for  shipment. 

5.  Framed  doors  are  to  be  built  of  seasoned  white  pine 

in  accordance  with  detailed  dimensions.  The  stile 
and  rails  are  to  be  framed  to  form  panels,  mortised 
and  tenoned  or  halved,  chamfered  and  supplied 
with  J4  round  in  the  interior  angles.  The  backing 
is  to  be  of  %  in.  white  pine  lumber;  not  over  4  in. 
wide,  matched,  beaded  and  surfaced  two  sides, 
put  on  the  frame  diagonally  in  one  or  two  thicknesses 
as  detailed,  and  thoroughly  fastened  to  frames  by 
screws.  All  doors  are  to  be  put  together  in  the 
best  manner,  with  white  lead  in  all  joints. 

6.  Doors  covered  with  tin  or  sheet  metal  are  to  be  made 

of  two  or  more  thicknesses  of  %  in.  matched  white 
pine  courses,  laid  diagonally,  thoroughly  put 
together  with  wrought  nails  well  clinched. 

7.  When  doors  are  in  pairs,  strips  are  to  be  placed  on  the 

edge  where  the  two  doors  join  each  other;  one  strip 
to  each  pair  of  swinging  doors  and  two  strips  if  the 
doors  are  sliding.  If  the  doors  are  hinged,  rabbet 
strips  must  accompany  them. 


LUMBER,   WINDOWS  AND  DOORS  169 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  ORDINARY  FACTORY 
WINDOWS  AND  DOORS 

Doors — Continued 

1.  Hardware,  such  as  hinges,  latches,  guides,  locks,  etc., 
which  attach  to  the  doors,  and  bolts  or  screws 
which  are  required  to  fasten  the  doors  to  the  frame 
work  of  the  building  proper,  also  hangers  for 
sliding  doors  and  the  weights,  pulleys  and  chains 
for  lifting  doors  are  not  furnished  by  the  door 
manufacturers.  If  included  in  the  contract,  they 
must  be  purchased  separately.  All  hardware  is  to 
be  suitable  for  the  work  for  which  the  doors  are 
furnished. 


16O  INDEX 

INDEX 

(The  figures  preceding  the  decimal  points  indicate  the  page 
numbers;  those  which  follow  refer  to  the  paragraph  numbers  in  the 
margin.) 

A=Stock use 37.2,  38.1  to  38.3 

Abbreviations approved  list. ...... 81,  82 

when  not  to  use 81,  124.5,  124.8,  125.3 

Advance  Bills lengths  of  material 37.1 

labeling  material 39.5,  40.1  to  40.3 

marked  complete 40.7 

not  written  for  eyebars  or  castings 38.4,  38.5 

preparation 36.1  to  43.5 

typical  illustration 41 

when  not  to  be  written 36.2 

Adjustable 
Members provided  in  bridge  trusses 5.11,  107.6 

Allowances .  .for  finishing 10.4  to  10.11,  47.2  to  47.4 

for  ordering  material  6.7  to  12.3,  15.4  to  15.9, 37.1 

Anchor  Bolts minimum  diameter 134.6,  134.7 

size  of  holes 106.6  to  107.3 

shipped  in  advance 111.5,  124.10 

type  to  use 115.8 

Assembling  Marks. for  beam  details 69.7,  69.8 

for  roof  trusses 85.5,  85.6 

ordinary 84.3  to  86.2 

"X"  duplicate 83.1  to  84.2 

Assignment 

Changed instruction  to  Order  Office 46.5,  47.1 

Auxiliary  Work holes  for 111.2 

Beams allowance  for  ordering 6.7  to  8.2,  11.6  to  12.2 

assembling  marks  for  details 69.7,  69.8 

bending  and  curving  to  be  avoided 102.2 

connections — standard  and  special. . . .  68.5to69.6 

coping  and  blocking 70.1  to  70.3 

capacity  of  shears 7.3 

details. , 66.1  to  71.8 

mill  over-run 70.7 

one  size  on  a  sheet 66.2 

open  holes  in  connection  angles 69.4  to  69.6 

preferable  types  of  connections.  .  .  .  112.2  to  112.5 

variation  in  length 70.4  to  70.8 

with  separators 71.2 


INDEX— Continued  161 

Beam  Girders method  of  detailing 71.2,  71.3 

Bearing values  of  masonry 134.5 

Bending  and 

Curving instructions 12.3,  101.7  to  102.2 

Bending allowances  for  in  ordering  . . .  '. 11.1  to  12.3 

Bent  Connections,  .when  to  use  plates 12.3 

Beveled  Beams and  channels — ordering 7.4,  7.5 

Bevel  Bed  Plates 64.3,  101.3 

Bolts for  galvanized  structural  material. .  .  117.6,  117.7 

list  for  erector  on  export  work 125.7 

ordering 13.4  to.  14.6 

percentage  to  order  for  erection 14.2  to  14.6 

Bolting general  rules 99.1  to  99.5 

Buckle  Plates erection 116.5 

ordering 14.8  to  15.3 

Built  Bolsters changed  to  cast  shoes 5.15 

Camber 128.1  to  131.2 

Car  Load 

Shipments 118.3,  118.4,  133.2 

Castings detailing 115.3  to  115.7 

Cast  Bases planing  required 115.6 

when  not  planed  on  bottom 135.6 

Cast  Shoes substituted  for  built  bolsters 5.15 

Cast  Iron used  instead  of  cast  steel . 6.2 

Channels (see  Beams) 

details  on  columns  composed  of.  ...  .112.6,  112.7 

special  requirements  in  detailing.  .  .  .71.4  to  71.6 
Change  Order. ....  .instructions  concerning 42.1  to  43.3 

typical 42 

Change  of 

Assignment instruction  to  Order  Office ". .  .46.5,  47.1 

Checkered  Plates. .  .avoid  countersunk  holes 116.3 

limiting  sizes 26. 1 

Clearance . . . ' erection 105.3  to  108.7 

at  ends  of  beams  and  girders 106.1,  106.2 

at  expansion  pockets 108.6 

for  anchor  bolts 106.6  to  107.3 

for  cranes — approval 135.7 

for  cross  frames 104.5,  106.3,  106.4 

for  inserted  plates 105.5 

for  movable  bridges 107.4,  107.5 

for  old  work 108.2 

for  pilot  nuts 105.2 

for  riveted  truss  members 105.3,  105.4 


162  INDEX— Continued 

Clevises ordered  on  advance  bill 38.6 

when  to  avoid 114.6 

Clinch  Rivets data 141.1  to  141.4 

Cold  Rolled 

Threads for  tie  and  sag-rods 14.7,  50.4 

on  anchor  bolts 115.8 

Column  Faces detailing 63. 1 

marking. .- 96.5,  110.1 

Columns details  on  channel 112.6,  112.7 

when  not  finished 100.5 

over-run  due  to  packing  of  covers 111.4 

rivet  spacing. . .  .• 60.1  to  61.7 

Conductors (down  spouts) 148.6  to  149.1 

Coping of  beams '. 70.1,  70.2 

Corrugated  Steel. .  .general  information 137.1  to  152.4 

arches 146.1  to  146.5 

copper  bearing. 139.6 

end  lap 138.3 

erection 144.3  to  145.4 

excess  in  ordering 139.3 

extras  to  base  price 152.2,  152.3 

fastenings 140.2  to  144.2 

for  export — wrapped  in  tarred  felt 125.8 

gauges  and  weights 137.1 

limitations  of  shear  used  in  field 138.5 

spacing  of  supports . 139.7 

standard  sizes 150.3 

stock  sizes 150.5 

Corrugated  Iron. .  .use  of  to  be  avoided 139.5 

Crane  Runway 
Beams allowance  for  ordering 8.1,  8.2 

Crane  Rail  Splice. .  .location 115.9 

Crane  Clearance. .  .approval 135.7 

Cross  Frame clearance 104,5,  106.3,  106.4 


Detailing general 58.1  to  71.8 

beams 66.1  to  71.8 

export  work 122.4  to  124.5 

Deck  Truss  Span. .  .length  of  stringers  and  laterals 130.2 

Diagonals amount  of  draw  to  allow 114.1,  114.2,  130.1 

Diaphragms over-run * 101.4 

Draw for  diagonals  and  laterals 114.1,  114.2,  130.1 

Drawing (see  Detailing) 


INDEX— Continued 


163 


Duplicate 

Members .on  different  orders 64.6 

Duplicate  Orders. .  .having  different  destinations 74.4 

Doors specifications . . 158.1  to  159.1 


Edge  Planing allowance 10.9,  47.3 

Erection bridges  and  buildings 103.1  to  111.6 

corrugated  sheeting 144.3  to  145.4 

detailing  to  simplify 103.1  to  111.6 

Erection  Bolts percentage  to  order 14.2  to  14.6 

Erection  Marks for  buildings 87.1  to  90.5 

for  bridges 91.1 

for  special  work 91.2 

Erection  Plans 52.4  to  52.7,  58.2,  125.2  to  125.6 

Export  Work general  information 121 . 1  to  127.4 

abbreviations  on  drawings ....  124.5,  124.8,  125.3 

anchor  bolts 124.10 

correspondence 127.4 

corrugated  steel  wrapped  in  tarred  felt. .  .  .125.8 

detailing 122.4  to  124.4 

erection  drawings 125.2  to  125.6 

erector's  rivet  and  bolt  list 125.7 

limiting  size  and  weight  of  pieces 122.3 

marking  and  numbering 125.9  to  125.13 

masonry  plans 124.7  to  124.9 

number  of  pilot  nuts  required 124.4 

ocean  freight  by  measurement  122.1, 123.1  to  123.4 
projecting  pieces  shipped  loose. 98.1,  121.2,  124.1 

prompt  deliveries  important 123.6 

shipping  bills 126.1  to  126.6 

XAB  number  on  each  sheet .- 124.6 

Extra  Material furnished  for  a  contract :    76.5 

Extra  Price on  plates  and  shapes 17.2 

on  sheet  steel 152.2,  152.4 

Expansion length  of  slots 109.2 

Expansion  Pockets .  clearance  for  field  rivets 108.6 

Extension  Figures.. on  beam  sketch 67.5  to  68.4 

Eyebars not  to  be  ordered  on  advance  bills 38.4 

packing  allowance 105.8 


Field  Drilling. . . 
Field  Rivets.. 


. .  .and  cutting  noted  on  drawings 110.2,  110.3 

. .  .erector's  list .65.1,  65.2,  125.7 

ordering 13.4,  13.5 

percentage  of  excess  to  order 13.4 


164  INDEX— Continued 

Finishing allowances 9.3,  10.4  to  10.11,  47.2  to  47.4 

noted  on  drawings 64.1  to  64.3 

Flashing data 146.6  to  147.6 

Flooring wooden 154.4  to  156.3 

Floor  Plans information  to  appear 135.1  to  135.5 

Forgings ordering 10.3 

Forms list  of  drawing  room  forms 79 

Framed  Beams allowance  for  ordering .6.7  to  7.7 

Freight (see  Shipping  Dimensions) 

Galvanizing 

Processes 116.7  to  117.1 

Galvanized  Struc= 

tural  Material 116.7  to  118.2 

bolt  field  connections 117.6,  117.7 

limiting  sizes 117.2  to  117.6 

no  paint  marks  on  raw  material 50.7,  118.1 

weight 118.2 

Galvanized  Corru= 

gated  Steel (see  Corrugated  Steel) 

Gas  Pipe . .  .random  lengths  to  be  ordered 50.2 

Gas  Pipe  Railing.  .  .detailing 6.4,  64.5 

Girder  Depth relation  to  width  of  web 8.5,  8.6,  100.6 

Girt spacing 115.10,  139.7 

Grouting under  cast  bases 135.6 

Gutters eave  and  valley 147.7  to  148.5 

Inter=Shop  Order.. use 65.3,  71.3 

Itemizing shop  bills 73.3 

Labeling material  on  advance  bills 39.5,  40.1  to  40.3 

material  on  mill  orders 44.4 

Laterals amount  of  draw  to  allow 114.1,  114.2 

deck  girders 113.6,  113.7 

deck  trusses 130.2 

lugs  omitted 115.2 

plates  to  clear  ties 108.7 

reversible 109.8 

Lattice for  box  members 102.3 

lineal  feet  on  advance  bill 37.1 

Latticed  Members.. templet  shop  to  determine  lengths 116.1 

Lintels (see  also  Beam  Girders) 113.8,  113.9 

Louvres data 146.6  to  147.5 

Lumber..  ..data..  .  .153.1  to  156.3 


INDEX— Continued 


165 


Masonry bearing  values 134.5 

Masonry  Plans information  to  appear 134.1  to  134.7 

for  export  work 124.7  to  124.9 

Material to  be  ordered  promptly 6.6 

Marking (see  Assembling  Marks,  Erection  Marks, 

Shipping  Marks,  Match  Marking) 

export  work 125.9  to  125.13 

for  loading  and  shipment 116.2 

material  to  be  galvanized 50.7,  118.1 

to  determine  direction 109.9,  110.1 

Match  Marking 92.1  to  95.7 

Maximum lengths  of  shapes  rolled 25  to  29 

Milling allowances  for 10.4  to  10.11,  47.2  to  47.4 

Mill  Extras on  structural  and  sheet  steel, 

17.1,  17.2,  151.1  to  152.4 

Mill  Orders information  sheets 45.1 

labeling  material 44.4 

preparation 44.1  to  50.7 

when  written  and  by  whom. 44.2 

when  marked  complete 44.5 

Mullions slot  connections 114.3 

Multiple  Punch. . .  .arrange  rivet  spacing 97.1  to  97.3 

requirements  for  beams 66.3  to  66.6 

Multiple  Lengths,  .for  shapes  and  plates 7.5,  13.1,  48.1  to  49.2 

Name  Plates on  all  structures 116.6 

Notes appearing  on  drawings 63.3  to  63.7 

Numbering drawings  and  bills 79  to  80.5 

Ordering  Material.. general  information 5.1  to  35 

Over=Run  or 

Under=Run of  beams 70.4,  70.7 

Packing allowance  for  eyebars  and  pin  plates 105.8 

allowance  for  cover  plates  on  columns 111.4 

Paint estimating  quantities 18.2 

noted  on  shipping  bills 75.5 

ordering 18.1 

Painting noted  on  drawings 63.3  to  63.5 

noted  on  shop  bills 73.4 

noted  on  shipping  bills 75.4 

Pilot  Nuts number  required  for  export  work 124.4 

Pipe random  lengths  to  be  ordered 50.2 

Pipe  Railing detailing 6.4,  64.5 


166  INDEX— Continued 

Pins allowances  for  cutting  and  finishing, 

9.5,  47.2,  48.3,  48.5 

Pin  Hole size  noted  on  drawing 64.4 

Pin  Plates allowance  for  packing 105.8 

Planing allowances 9.3,  10.4  to  10.11,  47.2  to  47.4 

castings 115.6 

end  connection  angles 10.11 

noted  on  drawings 64.1  to  64.3 

Plain  Material on  advance  bill 40.1 

Plank data 153.1  to  156.3 

Put=into-Stock. . .  .use  of  form 43.4,  43.5 

Purlins allowance  for  ordering 8.1,  8.3 

Purlin  Spacing 115.10,  139.7,  139.8 


Rails ordering 16.1  to  16.14 

shipped  direct  to  site 16.12 

splice  bars — ordering 16.13,  16.14 

Rail  Grillage change  to  cast  steel 6.3 

Reaming to  templet 58.4 

Referring from  one  drawing  to  another. .  .59.1  to  59.3,  61.3 

from  one  member  to  another 59.4  to  59.6 

Reference  Lines. . .  .on  detail  drawings 58.1 

Reinforce  Plates.  .  .width 9.1 

Requisitions Plant  and  Reassignment 45.3  to  46.2 

Revision of  drawings 77.2  to  78.2 

Rivets (shop)  percentages  for  estimating.  131. 3  to  132.3 

cold  driven 136.1  to  136.4 

ordering 13.4  to  14.1 

Rivet  Rods. ordering 50.3 

Rivet  List for  erector. 65.1,  65.2,  125.7 

Rivet  Spacing various  methods  of  showing 59.7  to  61.6 

Riveting general  data 97.4  to  98.9 

Rights  and  Lefts 61.7  to  62.2 

stiffeners 1 86.2 

Rollers  and 

Rockers allowances  for  ordering  and  finishing, 

10.3,  47.2,  48.3,  48.5 

Roof  Truss assembling  marks 85.5,  85.6 

erection  and  shipping  marks 88.1  to  90.5 

Roofing.  . corrugated  steel 137.1  to  139.6 

wooden. .  .  .  154.1  to  154.3 


INDEX— Continued  167 

Sag=rods cold  rolled  threads 14.7,  50.4 

Seats for  erection 109.3  to  109.5 

Seat  Angles allowable  loads 99.8  to  100.4 

Separators to  be  ordered  on  advance  bill 38.5 

Shafting data ,  .  .9.6  to  10.2,  47.2 

Shearing beams,  channels,  plates  and  angles .  .  .  .7.3,  102.5 

Sheet  Steel (see  Corrugated  Steel) 

Shipping  Bills general  information 74.1  to  75.5 

Shipping 

Dimensions and  weights 132.4  to  133.2 

Shipping  Marks. . .  .for  buildings.. 87.1  to  90.5 

for  bridges 91.1 

Shop  Bills general  information 72.1  to  73.4 

combining  and  separating  material.  . .  .72.6,  72.7 

Order  Office  to  take  care  of  printing 36.2 

used  as  advance  bills 36.2 

Shop  Rivets percentage  of  weight  for  estimating.  131. 3  to  132.3 

Sketch  Plates ordering 12.4  to  13.3,  48.6 

Slotted  Holes for  anchor  bolts 109.1,  109.2 

for  mullion  connections 114.3 

Slabs general  information 49.6,  50.1,  113.1  to  113.5 

allowances  for  finishing 47.4 

Spans shipped  riveted 111.1 

Special  Beams ordering 49.5 

Specifications noted  on  advance  bill 39.4 

workmanship  notes  on  drawings 63.3  to  63.7 

Splices location  for  crane  rails 115.9 

Splice  Bars for  rails — ordering 16.13,  16.14 

Stiffeners allowance  for  finishing 9.3 

to  be  R  and  L 86.2 

when  to  avoid 99.6  to  100.4 

Stitch  Rivets spacing !  .97.6  to  98.6 

in  loose  plates  and  fillers 109.6,  109.7 

Stock carried  by  A.  B.  Co.  Plants 30  to  35 

Stores carried  by  A.  B.  Co.  Plants 18  to  24 

Subdivision of  orders- 76.2  to  76.4 

Tap  Bolt  Holes 110.4 

Templets arranging  details  to  combine 96.4,  96.5 

Templet  Shop lengths  of  lattice  determined  by 116.1 

Tie=rods ordering 14.7,  50.4 

Tie=rod  Holes in  beams 66.4,  67.1 

Turnbuckles staggered  for  clearance 107.6 

required  in  pin  connected  trusses 5.11 


168  INDEX— Continued 

Typical  Advance 

Bill ..:.:... .;?; 41 

Typical  Change 

Order ... . 42 

Typical  Drawings,  .list 54  to  57 

purpose 51.1  to  51.4 

Universal  Mill 

Plates 39.1,  39.2 

Upset  Rods when  to  avoid 114.5 

Viaduct  Bents made  alike 101.5 

Watertight  Work,  general  information 119.1  to  120.6 

ordering     15.4  to  15.9 

Water  Pockets avoid 115.1,  115.7 

Windows specifications 156.4  to  157.4 

Wing  Plates ordering  and  detailing 13.3 

Workmanship notes  on  drawings 63.6,  63.7 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

DEPARTMENT  OF  CIVIL  ENGINEERING 

DERKELEY,  CALIFORNIA 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 


Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 
mMft  UBrtARY  


MAY  -5  1950)0 


LD  21-100m-9,'48(B399sl6).476 


7838337^.3^ 


Engineering 
Library 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


